JP2018078941A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To excellently improve a configuration of a game machine provided with a ball entry part to which prescribed privilege is imparted by game balls entering.SOLUTION: A downstream side of an upper surface of a lower big winning device 433 which game balls that have flown down a right ball passage 810 can reach is provided with an entrance 861A of a ball passage 861 game balls flowing down from the upper surface can enter and an entrance 862A of a ball passage 862. Then, the entrance 862A is provided in the way game balls flown down from the upper surface of the lower big winning device 433 enter with lower probability than the entrance 861A, so that many of the game balls which have reached the upper surface of the lower big winning device 433 through the right ball passage 810 when the game balls are shot at the right ball passage 810 enable a player to feel as if the player is guided to a right lower start winning device 832 or a general winning device 439B by way of the ball passage 861 or the ball passage 862.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball game machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a winning opening through which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, or a starting opening through which a predetermined lottery such as a big win lottery is performed when a game ball enters For example, a game area is provided with a ball entry portion to which a predetermined privilege is given as a game ball enters (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-004177 A

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine provided with a ball entering portion to which a predetermined privilege is given as a gaming ball enters like the above gaming machine.

  Accordingly, an object of the gaming machine according to the present invention is to suitably improve the configuration of a gaming machine provided with a ball entering portion to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention
An operation unit provided at a position where the player can perform a firing operation;
A launching means for launching a game ball with an intensity according to an operation amount of the operation unit when a launch operation is performed on the operation unit;
An upstream ball passage through which game balls launched from the launching means with a predetermined range of strength flow down;
An aligned flow lower portion provided downstream from the upstream sphere passage and causing the game balls passing through the upstream sphere passage to flow down to the downstream side in a row on the lower right side or the lower left side;
A ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower portion, and having a first passage entrance opened upward so that game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. Side first ball passage,
A first privilege granting unit that is provided in the downstream first ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters;
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet that opens upward on the right or left side with respect to the first passage inlet and away from the aligned flow lower portion, the right lower side or the lower left side from the aligned flow lower portion A second ball passage on the downstream side in which the game ball that has flowed down into the first passage enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage;
A second privilege granting unit that is provided in the downstream second ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit when a game ball enters. It is characterized by.

  With the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the configuration of the gaming machine provided with a ball entering portion to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters.

Front side perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing pachinko machine in open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Partial enlarged front view of game board Partial enlarged front view of game board Partial enlarged front view of a variation of the game board The front view which expanded the right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment partially. The flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment Timing chart showing the operation of the lower prize-winning device in an advantageous fluctuation state Front view showing an example of a decorative symbol display device on which information that can be removed is displayed Front view of game board in pachinko machine according to the third embodiment The front view which expanded the right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment partially. The front view which expanded partially the lower right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the front view which expanded the upper right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment partially, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the AA line of Fig.23 (a). It is.

  With respect to an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball and ball gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described, and then a modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the structure of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows that the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 are integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Show. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body support means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. The game machine is installed in a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101. It is good also as a structure with which the island facility was equipped with the support mechanism to support, and a part of locking mechanism which locks the main-body part.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (on the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. The base end side is configured to be capable of rotating forward with the other end side (right side) serving as a rotating front end side.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided separately at the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. Each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 is configured such that, for example, a shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft portion is provided in a shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. It is comprised so that rotation is possible by setting it as the state inserted. In addition, the structure which can rotate the main-body part of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is not limited to the above structure, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft part is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. Removably attached to it. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving it upward. The Thereby, the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

  The front block 102 is disposed so as to overlap the front side with respect to the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side of the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 so as to be pivotable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side with respect to the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so that the rear block 104 can be rotated rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. And, it is configured to be supported so as to be removable by a predetermined removal operation.

  The pachinko machine 100 also includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 relative to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the front block 102 relative to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block There is provided a lock operating mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operating mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

  As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed with an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is activated. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 and the movable portion 143 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / close permitted state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation with a predetermined operation key on the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 are disengaged, and the front block 102 is in an open / close permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By this rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched with respect to the intermediate block 103 between a state in which opening / closing is prohibited (open / close prohibited state) and a state in which opening / closing is permitted (open / close permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism includes two opening / closing restriction portions 150 </ b> A and 150 </ b> B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restriction portion 150 </ b> C provided in the rear block 104. . The three opening / closing regulating portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 due to the rotation operation, and thereby the open / close prohibited posture corresponding to the open / close prohibited state And an open / close permission posture corresponding to the open / close permission state can be switched. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are in the opening / closing allowable posture, the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 is in an opening / closing allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open / close prohibited posture and the open / close allowable posture may be switched between the open / close prohibited state and the open / close permitted state by at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. Alternatively, it may be configured to move in a certain direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each apparatus move between a plurality of postures.

  Among the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibited state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponding to the remaining portion is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the opening / closing allowable posture only by an operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been increased.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism for restricting the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction changing unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (a closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restricting piece 161 is in a movement-permitted state that allows the game ball to flow down. The change unit 162 is pushed and pushed to the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow restricting piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement-permitted state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (open state of the front block 102), the pressure of the flow restricting piece 161 by the restriction changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. Accordingly, the movement restriction state in which the flow restriction piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102 is set. The flow restriction piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in the rear view). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 is provided is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed with respect to 103 is provided.

  Next, each structure of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the back block 104 is demonstrated in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms a substantially entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It functions as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly configured by a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts before and after the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that is formed to include the front-view center portion of the front block 102. It is attached. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through the wide area excluding the outer periphery to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. The intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player through the opening 210A.

  1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 that stores game balls and a launch operation device 250 that is operated by a player to sequentially launch game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 onto the game board 400 are provided.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the periphery of the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210, and projects forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A. An upper projecting portion 217, a lower projecting portion 218 located below the upper projecting portion 217 and projecting forward, and an upper projecting portion 217 and a lower projecting portion on the right side of the lower projecting portion 218. A flat portion 219 is formed which is configured by a substantially flat region located on the back side from 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is disposed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visually recognized while closing the opening 210 </ b> A formed penetrating in the front-rear direction in a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the center panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light transmitting property fitted on the front side of the panel frame 221. 1 and a light transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap on the rear side of the panel frame 221. Yes.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls lent out from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage portion 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 includes an inflow port 231 </ b> A that allows game balls to flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and an outflow port (not shown) that allows game balls to flow out from the storage unit 231 into the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream from the outflow port is provided. By releasing the discharge port, the game ball is released from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  A game ball acquired according to the progress of the game and a game ball lent according to a lending operation to a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. The storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and a game ball owned by a player is manually inserted through the opening, or a game ball lent out at a game hall is supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a row. When a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) is not performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through an outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. And a ball removal operation member 242 for operating the ball removal mechanism 243. A game ball or the like acquired as the game progresses mainly flows into the main storage mechanism 230, but flows into the storage unit 241 through the inlet 241A if the storage unit 231 is full. Further, even in response to the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 242, the release state is kept until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removal operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) for detecting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) for detecting that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and the firing handle 252 It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the injection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the launch handle 252 is rotated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launch device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the rotational operation amount. When the contact between the firing handle 252 and the player is not detected by the contact sensor 254, or when the firing operation is invalidated by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

  In addition, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided at the back of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge 211 includes an upper central edge 211A, an upper left edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on both the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, and an upper left edge. The left side edge portion 211D positioned below 211B and the right side edge portion 211E positioned below the upper right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission corresponding to each light emitting portion Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

  The frame light-emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light-emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, a left upper frame light-emitting device 272 corresponding to the left upper edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emission corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. The apparatus 273 includes a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 integrates and electrically connects a light emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and the electronic components. And a printed circuit board.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G at the upper portion of the opening peripheral edge 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. In addition, an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to each of the upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (in the rear of) the opening peripheral edge 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right portion of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, and the like placed in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the card, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills or cards are inserted into the card unit and numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are lent out. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, a card in which the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the remaining amount or the remaining amount is recorded is returned from the card unit according to the returning operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of an input operation different from the shooting operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up / down / left / right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, an apparatus setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player It is possible to execute a production setting operation or the like that enables execution of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the game before the previous time by inputting information, and these operations can be performed by the player or the game hall manager as necessary. It is said that. Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated and moved up and down by input operation unit driving means such as a motor and a solenoid. Alternatively, it is preferable that an operation such as vibration is performed by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), before and after the input operation, or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at any or a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively urging the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and the front block 102 and the rear block 104 are attached so that the main body of the pachinko machine 100 is integrated. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

  3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to the 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to be ejected, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is attached to the back side of the game board 400 and controls the progress of the game in an integrated manner. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notifications.

  In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball released from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wires inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 The signal relay device 311 includes a wiring, and has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having a through-hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that curves smoothly from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, the inner rail 403 that curves smoothly from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and the upper right end of the outer rail 402 And a rebound preventing member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball launched from a launch device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed at a portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 are opposed in parallel from returning to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorption property that prevents a significant recoil of the game ball that has passed the upper center of the game board 400 and directed to the right side through the upper center and returns to the left side again. For example, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guide member 335 for guiding the game ball from the launcher 330 in the direction of the launch path 401B and the outer rail 402, and the launcher 330 was launched but launched without exceeding the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning backward in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inlet 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area, and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape having a large area in the front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area is generally divided into an outer peripheral portion by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is substantially planar by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially planar by the base body 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 sequentially sends out game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). A launching mechanism 333 for injecting a game ball arranged at the launch position, a launching solenoid 334 for driving the launching mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball launched from the launching mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes in accordance with the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure that accommodates the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

  Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, an attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main controller 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372. As a result, not only the rear side (front side) of the main control device 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 is operated on the game board 400 by rotating the mounting portion 372. It can be easily confirmed while attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the attachment portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal state of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure that accommodates the sub-control board 940. For example, the sub-control board 940 is housed in a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, like the main control board 920. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, flow-down changing members such as nails 411 and windmills 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center disposed at the center of the base body 401. A structure 420, a starting device (specifically, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) according to a first special symbol disposed below the central structure 420, a center A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) according to a second special symbol arranged on the lower right side with respect to the structure 420, and a big winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432 434 (specifically, the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning-winning device 432, and the game board 400 On the top right and above and below Winning device that the winning combination communicating actuating device 435 which is arranged above (upstream side) with respect to 433, regular winning device 439A arranged on both left and right sides of the lower side middle starting winning device 431 B, and a 439B.

  In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-described upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10). The entry of a game ball into a predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right start winning switch 442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432, lower large prize switch 443 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower large winning device 433, and a top large winning device. An upper prize switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered 434, a combination operation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the combination actuating device 435, a start switch 446 that detects a game ball that has entered the starter 436, and the bottom Non-specific path switch for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific path (not shown in FIG. 7) formed inside the grand prize winning device 433 47, a specific path switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown in FIG. 7) formed inside the lower grand prize winning device 433, and a game ball that has entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively. General winning switches 449A, 449B and the like to be detected are installed on the game board 400.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for preventing fraud (see FIG. 10), and an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100 can be detected. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starter 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged into the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, upper middle starting winning device 431A, lower middle starting winning device 431B, right starting winning device 432, lower large winning device 433, upper large winning device 434 and general winning devices 439A, 439B The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball that has entered each winning opening is guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. . In addition, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or an apparatus in which two or more winning devices (for example, the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B) are integrated. The starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A may not necessarily be a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. It is good also as a entrance where a ball | bowl is discharge | released again to a game area, without paying out.

  Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B according to the first special symbol does not change the probability of entering the game ball into them. The played game ball is guided to the back side of the base body 401. Further, the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball into the inside. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol. Instead of or in addition to that, the starting device and the general winning device related to the first special symbol. It may be provided in any one or a plurality of 439A and 439B. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operate | moves mechanically.

  The right start prize winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 that changes an entry probability of a game ball to the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism A right entry restricting solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) for driving 452. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces that are driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces are the entrance (award opening). The game ball cannot enter the right start prize-winning device 432 by adopting an arrangement that narrows (or closes)), but when the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the approaching allowable posture, the two movable pieces are at their tips. The game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by arranging the parts so that the interval between the parts is increased. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 enters the right when a game ball that has entered the starter 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”). In accordance with the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the posture is allowed to enter the predetermined allowable number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower grand prize winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an allowable entry position and an prohibited entry attitude, and a lower entry restriction mechanism. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance posture and the guidance posture causes the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 to be a non-specific passage or a specific passage. A sorting mechanism for sorting and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the attitude of the sorting mechanism are provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry prohibition posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning entrance), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower entry device 433. When the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 is in the approach permitting posture, the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower prize-winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and is in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed backward. It is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the game state transition, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, an advantageous game state is given to the player as a privilege. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and an upper entry restriction. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning port) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, but the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 Is in the allowance for entering position, the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434.

  In addition, as an approach allowable posture and an entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entering a game ball into the right entry restricting mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured to receive a winning opening (or a winning opening) of each device. In response to a change in posture of the operation member that switches between a special state in which a game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operation member differs depending on each posture I just need it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of a game ball such as the right entry restriction mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the game ball in an inaccessible state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed so that the game ball can enter more easily than the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 and the upper prize-winning apparatus 434 when winning a lottery. Specifically, a game ball that has entered the upper middle start prize device 431A or the lower middle start prize device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle start prize switch 441A or the lower middle start prize switch 441B. When a lottery based on the above (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”) is won, or a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442 When winning a lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”), at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453 and the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 takes the approach permitting posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 to the approach allowable posture, and further switches after the predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. The non-guided posture is returned in response to the stop of the solenoid 465.

  The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the big win lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a player wins a big hit, the player can start a special gaming state at the timing he / she intends. Note that it is not always necessary that either the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination actuating device 435 passes, instead of or In addition, either the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 may be activated when a predetermined time elapses.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 for displaying symbol change display and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times a game is held. A display device having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

  Specifically, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the game board 400 in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The special symbol display device 471 related to the special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or the second special symbol is displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game is held according to the first special symbol, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game is held related to the second special symbol A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are each reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start prize, and whether or not a lottery is executed based on one start prize and a lottery based on the determination A series of games including the start and end of variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held for the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle start winning prize. Even if it is detected by the switch 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, no unit game right related to the second special symbol is added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of the plurality of light emitting units (a combination of a light emission state including a light emission color (off, on, flashing)). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol have the number of times of holding depending on the combination of the light emission states (off, on, flashing) of the two single color light emitting units. indicate.

  In addition, the game board 400 includes a normal symbol display device 473 that variably displays the normal symbols in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, or displays the normal symbols in a fixed manner according to the lottery result. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of hold times of the right of the unit game is provided. The right to unit games related to normal symbols is reserved up to 4 times. If the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held for the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446. .

  The normal symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). A normal symbol is expressed by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of hold times by a combination of the light emission states (off, on, flashing) of the two single color light emitting units.

  In addition, the game board 400 overlaps behind the central structure 420, and in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The decorative symbol variation display and finalization display are controlled by the sub-control board 940 and are substantially synchronized with the main special control board 920 variation display and finalization display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940. Various light emission effects and state notifications by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal game state”) is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as “non-short state”). Correspond.

  When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the lower grand prize winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the win. Depending on whether or not, the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-short-time state (hereinafter referred to as the “short-time state”). And a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a “low-probability state”) in which the winning probability of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”). In the following, it is also referred to as “time saving gaming state”. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game is in a short-time state and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal game state. The game state (hereinafter also referred to as “probability game state”), which is a “high probability state” (hereinafter, also referred to as “high probability state”).

  The short-time gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but thereafter returns to the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but thereafter returns to the normal gaming state.

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may be continued until the next big win, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration in which a gaming state different from the above-described gaming states is further included, or a configuration in which the gaming state is shifted by a condition different from the above-described conditions may be employed.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, various variation pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When a game ball that has entered one of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by one of the medium start winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol is detected. It becomes. At the time of starting winning the first special symbol, if the unit game right related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number, jackpot symbol random number and stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the main control board 920 RAM.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the right is not reserved, it is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the game is not in a special game state, when the unit game right related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the end of the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning. If each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all of the units that were held before the current starting winning prize after the special gaming state. It starts after a unit game related to a special symbol.

  In addition, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the current start winning, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol in order of the start winning. The configuration may be such that unit advantage control is executed, or the two special symbols are not alternative but can be varied simultaneously.

  In the case of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is further based on the acquired jackpot symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The types of stop symbols correspond to the types of jackpots, for example, the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds), A plurality of types of jackpots are set corresponding to the type of gaming state such as a gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state), and a jackpot symbol is set for each type. In the first special symbol lottery, when a big win is not won, a lost symbol different from the big win symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current gaming state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variation pattern random number values, and the number of reserved unit rights related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol The design variation display time is determined, and the design variation pattern is selected. Thereafter, the first special symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol variation display (variation effect) on the decoration symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol variation is started. Variation display according to a certain pattern is continued over the display time, and variation display according to the variation pattern is continued over the variation display time in the decorative design. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the lower prize winning device 433 are allowed to enter the prescribed number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of the big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 443 and 444 in each of the allowed entry postures in the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum When the allowable entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

  The lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 are configured such that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) ) Will shift to the first allowed entry posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the last return to the prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the state shifts to the short-time game state or the probability change game state.

  In various gaming states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the start special winning of the second special symbol is made. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times when starting the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. Also, stop symbol determination according to the second special symbol lottery, decoration symbol variation pattern selection, variation display execution, game state transition control, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various gaming states, when a game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446, the winning random number for the normal symbol is acquired unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already obtained normal symbol.

  In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning game is won based on the value of the winning random number, and when winning, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lose symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol display device 473 starts the variable display of the normal symbol. In the non-time-short state, the variable pattern is continuously displayed over a predetermined variable display time, and in the time-short state. The variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time-short state. As the predetermined time corresponding to the gaming state elapses, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed over a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowable posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-short state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 432 has a predetermined maximum allowable permissible time (for example, 0) for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). .2 seconds), and in the case of winning in the short time state (short time gaming state and probability variable gaming state), a predetermined number of times (when the right start winning device 432 is in the non-short time state) For example, it shifts intermittently to the approach permitting posture for a predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the non-time-short state. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum allowable entry time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of times of transition to the permissible approach posture has not reached the predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, the normal symbol lottery must be won, and further, the game ball enters the right start prize winning device 432 in the permitted entry state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability of winning for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the short-time gaming state, but the staying time in the permitted entry state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, about 0.1 seconds x 1) is set to be very short compared to the time spent in the short-time state (for example, about 4.8 seconds x 3 times). The opportunity per unit time is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, in the short-time state such as the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the special game state thereafter, the player plays the game aiming at the transition to the probability changing game state by entering the specific passage. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the game is played aiming to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery before each gaming state ends.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 at the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game technique (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. Method) and a game method (right-handed game method) in which a game ball flows down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. In the normal gaming state, the player plays the game using the left-handed gaming method, and in the short-time gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state, the player plays the game using the right-handed gaming method. The lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 are also arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, and a game is played by a right-handed game technique even in a special game state.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball can be caused to flow down through the left flow down region 407 by striking the game ball with a strength to fly so as to exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404 but not the branch position P1. By launching the game ball with a strength that flies over the position P2, the game ball can flow down through the right-fall region 408, and further, the strength that flies over the branch position P1 but not over the branch position P2. The game ball can be flowed down through the middle flow down region 409 by launching the game ball at Note that the game balls that have been flying enter the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B in the same manner as in a general game in the left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state. In the game using the right-handed gaming method in the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state in general, the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 (see FIGS. 1 and 5) is adjusted so that the launch strength becomes easy. As in a typical case, the game ball is launched by fixing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 to the maximum rotation operation amount so that the launch strength of the game ball is maximized. However, in the game using the right-handed game technique in the special game state, unlike a general case, the game ball is launched at the maximum strength, and the flight jumps so as to exceed the branch position P1 but not the branch position P2. In order to selectively perform the launch of the game ball at the strength, the game ball is launched by appropriately switching the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base 501. By connecting the base body 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

  The rear block 104 has a game ball tank 510 serving as a ball storage unit for storing game balls, and rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) continuously on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one row. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530 A payout device 540 that lends out game balls, and guidance as a ball guide unit that guides game balls that have flowed out of the payout device 540 downstream of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 for controlling the payout of game balls and the lending of game balls by the payout device 540, and external power A function as a power supply means for converting and outputting power of a predetermined voltage required for various types of devices and the like, and a game ball ejection based on a launch operation on the launch operation device 250 are controlled in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 And a relay device 950 that relays signals between them.

  The base body 501 is integrally formed of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 positioned behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as a mounted part.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover 503 is not shaped to cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that requires frequent inspection and confirmation, such as a part of the main controller 370, is attached to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window portion for exposure to the window. A large number of air holes 503 </ b> A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of heat generation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island facility are sequentially supplied to one end side in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game ball is supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction (front-rear direction) perpendicular to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 gradually increases in height as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521 and the passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially bowl-shaped gaming ball having a width that passes in line with one row of game balls. And a rectifying member 522 that rectifies a game ball that has a lower top surface portion and flows down the passage from the height of the game ball that overlaps vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed in a vertically long shape so as to continue to the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows in. The case rail 530 continues downward while curving left and right so that game balls do not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball break detector 539 for detecting a ball break is provided in the middle portion of the ball path of the case rail 530. The ball breakage detection unit 539 includes a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10). The storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof, and a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball condition that is not replenished normally.

  The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending out the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In accordance with the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released downstream. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by a payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payout of game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned at the lower back side of the rear block 104. It has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board in a model change or the like.

  The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the payout control board 930. The payout control board 930 does not leave any trace of opening, like the main control board 920. The substrate case is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

  The power / fire control device 570 includes a power / fire control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power / fire control board 900. The power / fire control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. Are accommodated in a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / launch control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launching device according to the operation of the launching operation device 250. A launch control unit 902 that controls the driving of 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays a setting display signal from the main control board 920, an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907, and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249. I have.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various types of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of driving voltage (for example, DC 12 volts) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. Power of control voltage (for example, DC 5 volts) for backup, power of backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power are supplied to the power monitoring board 910. The main control board 920 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901. When the power switch 909 is in an off state, the external power capture is stopped. It is to be noted that the power switch 909 is turned off or a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 is removed from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state where the supply of power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped and a state where the supply of external power itself is stopped are collectively referred to as a “power failure state”. The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the control voltage power over a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and finish the control so that the current control state can be restored.

  The firing control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the launching device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on a contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and a launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is provided. On the condition that it is not operated, the firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an on state to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 activates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and activates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially fired from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252).

  The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the on state.

  Further, when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on detection of the ball overflow signal in the on state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal receives the payout motor 542. The rotational speed (payout speed of the game ball from the payout device 540) is reduced. Conversely, a high-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal increases the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. It will be.

  The power monitoring board 910 is a power monitoring section 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power / fire control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power / fire control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power source unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the state is a power failure, and an on-state power failure signal is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the on state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. On the main control board 920, an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily during execution of the control program. And a RAM (not shown) for storing and the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. Yes.
The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (back up) internal data by supplying a backup voltage from the power / fire control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls a game ball payout operation by the payout apparatus 540 according to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a game ball lending operation by the payout apparatus 540 according to an operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. As with the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 is an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), ROM (not shown), and RAM (not shown), a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to be able to communicate information. For example, the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 can perform bidirectional information input / output communication. The open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 are connected so that only information input communication in only one direction is possible, and the payout motor 542 has information in only one direction. Only output communication is possible. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may be configured to have a backup function that allows internal data to be maintained over a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the case, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

  The sub control board 940 controls operations of various rendering devices, various light emitting devices, various acoustic devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to be able to communicate information. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only information input communication in only one direction is possible. The input operation device 260 is connected to be capable of information communication in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 is connected to be capable of only one-way information output communication.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started upon recovery from a power failure state, and periodic execution (in this embodiment, with a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

  In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition processing S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of the RAM) and the normal symbol related to the special symbol Random initial value update processing S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type for determining the variation time, variation pattern, etc. Fluctuation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the counter (part of the RAM), and interrupt permission processing S for permitting interrupts 023 and is repeatedly executed. When a timer interrupt request is generated before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

  In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (part of the RAM) for controlling the execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A stand-by standby process S1003 that waits for a predetermined time until 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like stand up is executed.

  After start-up standby process S1003, determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from initialization switch 907 of power supply / emission control board 900, determination process S1005 of the value of power failure information (part of RAM), storage Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and based on these determination results, it is determined whether or not the information of substantially the entire area of the RAM is to be erased.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and a power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state. It is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value that is the 2's complement of the checksum value calculated in (0) is “0” (determination processing S1007), and thereby the current checksum value and It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the on state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the stored information is stored and terminated when the transition to the power failure state is completed (S1005: N), or saved If the information is not normally held (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 is executed to erase information on substantially the entire area of the RAM. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a determination process S1010 of whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is a power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initial setting of various types of information including a return of stored information and a recovery command indicating completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the return of the retained information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is returned to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not a power failure value (S1010: Y), various types of information are initialized without returning the retained information (RAM initial setting processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output processing S1014).

  In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as fraud detection errors immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if has occurred, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. In each of these, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

  After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of transition to the previous power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparation for returning is performed (special gaming state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and a process corresponding to the game situation in the power failure state is executed in the sub-control board 940. The

  After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether or not the time-short state flag is set by determining whether or not the time-short state flag is set (determination process S1016). In the case (S1016: Y), a time reduction command is output (time reduction command output processing S1017). On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-short state (S1016: N), a non-time-short command is output (non-time-short command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to the substantial control of the pachinko machine 100 is sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on various fraud detections (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be described individually.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected at all three times, it is determined that the power failure state is present. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is out, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantially no processing is performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. In addition, since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the first reception of the power failure signal is detected.

  In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), it is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and the special symbol When the value of the winning random number counter relating to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the value after the change is the same as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol. The cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range determined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and a plurality of counters are updated asynchronously. Is referred to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the big hit symbol random number counter and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value “1” larger than the current value, When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The initial random number counter for the special symbol and the initial random number counter for the normal symbol are also the initial random numbers for the special symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as the value counter.

  In the variation counter update processing S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation time, variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is a value different from a specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  Note that each winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter and each variation type counter related to special symbols and normal symbols are not necessarily configured as described above, and at least a part of the counter is configured as another configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using an initial value counter, or may be configured by a random number generating IC without using a program and refer to a value as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or when the fraud detection value is already the game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing the substantial process. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. In the determination process S1207, whether or not the game is stopped is determined based on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the normal symbol related to the normal symbol Signals for controlling various notification devices such as the display device 473 are output. Based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right entry restriction solenoid 462, a lower entry restriction solenoid 463, an upper entry restriction solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower large winning switch 443, the upper large winning switch 444, the combination operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specific The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, signal states from various switches are read into the input buffer (part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and signals from the various switches are read. Each time, the signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), changes in the detection state of various switches are detected. For each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and when the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is on. Thus, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer update processing S1210, various timers (predetermined areas in the RAM) used for special symbol and normal symbol variation display, control of each gaming state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

  In the fraud detection process S1211, an illegal act such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower grand prize winning device 433, and the upper grand prize winning device 434 are forced to move into the allowable approaching posture, and the game ball is guided to a specific passage of the lower major prize winning device 433 by vibration. , The right start winning device 432 by radio waves, the lower winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly triggered, the game balls are guided to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, There is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball at an abnormal timing to the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 is performed. Detect occurrence.

  In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided in the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of the RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of the RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). If the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set on the basis, the big prize counter (predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, launch related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, an intermediate block is provided for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). It is detected whether 103 (refer FIG.1 and FIG.2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by 1 each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, 3) corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 is awarded. In a situation where a ball command is requested and the payout of a prize ball is continuing, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) that has a different number of prize balls than the first payout counter, and receives a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter. When the 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, control for holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and if the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, Operation control of 433 and the top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

  Further, in the special symbol related process S1217, the unit game right holding control related to the second special symbol and the unit game control related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, Operation control of 433 and the top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

  In the normal symbol related process S1218, the unit game right holding control related to the normal symbol and the unit game control related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed. .

  In the display control processing S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related processing S1217, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating these devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Flowing aspect of game balls>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the game area will be described. 13 is a front view in which the upper side of the game board 400 is partially enlarged, and FIG. 14 is a front view in which the right side of the game board 400 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 7 is also referred to if necessary.

  In the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 7, a game area roughly defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 is formed. In the game area, various structures such as the central structure 420, and the like, Various devices such as a grand prize winning device 433 and an upper prize winning device 434 are provided. The flight of the game ball in the game area is determined by the launch strength when launched from the launching device 330 and the shape of the outer rail 402. Here, the “flying game ball” means a movement until the game ball that exceeds the return ball prevention mechanism 404 comes into contact with a member other than the outer rail 402. The launch strength of the game ball launched from the launch device 330 is proportional to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 252 (see FIGS. 1 and 5) of the launch operation device 250, and the maximum rotational operation amount of the launch handle 252 is approximately 120 °. It is. When the launch handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is launched from the launch device 330 at approximately 0.6 second intervals. Even when the launch handle 252 is being rotated by the player, the launch of the game ball is stopped when the launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) is pressed.

  The inclination of the arc-shaped portion that determines the upper boundary of the game area in the outer rail 402 (the inclination of the tangent to the outer rail 402 with respect to the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100) is, as shown in FIG. In the vicinity where the recoil prevention member 405 is disposed, the inclination is approximately 45 degrees to the right. The game ball launched from the launching device 330 with the maximum strength flies along the arc-shaped portion of the outer rail 402. In the following, the flight trajectory of the game ball launched with the maximum strength is referred to as the “maximum flight trajectory”.

  At the upper part of the central structure 420, as shown in FIG. 13, the branch position P1 that is opposite to the maximum height position of the central structure 420 and that the slope of the outer rail 402 rises to the right is about 5 degrees. Thus, a left wall portion 421 that is descending to the left is formed. Note that the branch position P1 is based on the maximum width W (see FIG. 7) between the left end T1 (see FIG. 7) and the right end T2 (see FIG. 7) of the game area, and the maximum width from the left end T1 of the game area. The center position is approximately 45% of the width of W.

  A game ball that is launched with a strength that exceeds the return ball prevention mechanism 404 but does not exceed the branch position P1 (approximately 20% or more and less than 45% of the maximum strength) is more than the portion of the outer rail 402 that faces the branch position P1. It is separated from the maximum flight trajectory before this and collides with the nail 411 and the left wall 421, and flows down the left flow area 407 formed on the left outer edge side of the central structure 420.

  In addition, a right wall portion 422 that is lowered to the right by approximately 40 degrees from the branch position P2 that faces the portion where the inclination of the outer rail 402 is 40 degrees that is lowered to the right is formed on the upper portion of the central structure 420. Note that the branch position P2 is a position on the right side by approximately 80% of the maximum width W from the left end T1 of the game area, based on the maximum width W of the game area. A game ball launched with a strength exceeding the branch position P2 (75% or more of the maximum strength) flows down the right flow region 408. As shown in FIG. 14, the right-falling region 408 is formed by a region in which a game ball is guided to the branch passage 408A by the right wall portion 422, a branch passage 408A, and a curved passage 408B.

  Specifically, the game ball launched with the maximum strength flies along the maximum flight trajectory, collides with the recoil prevention member 405, and starts to flow down the right flow down region 408. In addition, a game ball that is launched in a predetermined strength range that is weaker than the maximum strength (a range that is 80% or more of the maximum strength and less than the maximum strength) enters the maximum flight trajectory at a slower speed than when it is launched at the maximum strength. The rebound prevention member 405 flies along and starts to flow down in the right flow down region 408. The game ball that has collided with the recoil prevention member 405 is then formed on the right outer edge side of the central structure 420 through the branch passage 408A in which the middle portion branches into two and the curved passage 408B communicating with the branch passage 408A. It is guided above the big prize device 433 and the top big prize device 434. In addition, a game ball launched in a weaker predetermined strength range (a range of 75% or more of the maximum strength and less than 80% of the maximum strength) deviates from the maximum flight trajectory on the way and collides with the right wall portion 422. The flow starts in the flow area 408. The game ball that has collided with the right wall 422 then recoils toward the recoil prevention member 405, collides with the recoil prevention member 405, and enters the branch passage 408A.

  Further, the upper portion of the central structure 420 is curved downward from the right end (branch position P1) of the left wall portion 421 between the left wall portion 421 and the right wall portion 422, and the left end of the right wall portion 422 ( An intermediate wall portion 423 is formed which extends to the lower side of the branch position P2). In addition, a guide passage 424 that smoothly guides the game ball is formed at the right end of the central structure 420. A step portion between the right end of the middle wall portion 423 and the left end of the right wall portion 422 is an entrance 424A to the guide passage 424, and the game ball that has entered the entrance 424A is located at the upper left of the upper prize winning device 434. It is discharged from the formed discharge port 424B. In addition, a midstream down area 409 is formed by the area where the game ball is guided to the guide path 424 by the middle wall portion 423 and the guide path 424.

  A game ball launched in a predetermined strength range (a range of 45% or more of the maximum strength and less than 75% of the maximum strength) deviates from the maximum flight trajectory on the way and collides with the middle wall portion 423, and in the middle downstream area 409 Start to flow down. The game ball that has collided with the middle wall portion 423 then rebounds slightly, but is smoothly guided to the entrance 424A of the guide passage 424 substantially along the middle wall portion 423. Note that the middle wall portion 423 has a shape in which the inclination becomes steeper as it moves to the right side from the branch position P1, and even if the game ball collides at any position of the middle wall portion 423, the middle wall portion 423 has a thin angle. However, it can recoil only toward the entrance 424A. Further, the guide passage 424 has a shape that bends in multiple stages in a plane along the surface of the base body 401 of the game board 400, and the game ball is smoothly guided from the entrance 424A to the discharge port 424B also in the guide passage 424. .

  The shape of the guide passage 424 is such that the time when the game ball reaches the upper prize winning device 434 through the middle downstream area 409 after the game ball is launched with a predetermined strength exceeding the branch position P1 but not exceeding the branch position P2 Is longer by the time corresponding to the shortest firing interval by the launching device 330 (for example, 0.6 seconds) than the time for reaching the top prize winning device 434 through the right-falling region 408 after being launched at the maximum intensity. Have been adjusted so that. The upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 are arranged close to each other and there is no member for changing the flow of the game ball between them. The time difference between the case where the player enters the lower prize-winning device 433 and the case where the player enters the lower prize-winning device 433 through the right flow down area 408 is substantially the same as that for the upper prize-winning device 434. The time for reaching the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the middle downstream area 409 and the time for reaching the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the right downstream area 408 are as follows. The time corresponding to the mode value in the frequency distribution based on a large number of trials, the average time based on the frequency distribution, the weighted average time based on the frequency distribution, and the like can be employed.

  Here, the operation of the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 and the behavior of the game ball in them will be described.

  When a big win is won by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the mode of the special gaming state is determined, and the state shifts to the special gaming state of the determined mode. Specifically, it is a special game state for a short period (6 rounds in this embodiment) with a small number of continuous rounds or a special game state for a long period (16 rounds in this embodiment) with a large number of continuous rounds. In each round of the special game state, when the maximum allowable entry time (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, or the specified number (8 balls in this embodiment) of game balls is the top prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). ) Or the lower big prize switch 443 (see FIGS. 10 and 14), the upper big prize device 434 and the lower big prize device 433 change from the entry permission state to the entry prohibition state. Normally, when a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 or the lower prize winning switch 443, the entry allowable state is changed to the entry prohibited state.

  Here, the behavior of the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 and its detection will be described. In the entry permitted state of the upper prize winning device 434, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 (see FIG. 7; omitted in FIG. 14) is inclined so that the upper end protrudes forward, and the diameter of the game ball is approximately 5 A game ball can enter through a double lateral entrance 434A. The game ball that has reached the upper prize winning device 434 is guided to the back by the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 and enters the entrance 434A. Inside the upper prize winning device 434 is formed slightly on the center side from the right end, and a left side guide passage portion 434B that guides the game ball to the back and a left side slope that slopes downward to the right on the left side of the back guide passage portion 434B. A passage portion 434C and a right-side inclined passage portion 434D that is inclined to the lower left on the right side of the back guide passage portion 434B are formed. An upper prize winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 is provided in the back guide passage portion 434B, and a game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 passes through the rear guide passage portion 434B. It is detected after being guided deeper than the left inclined passage portion 434C and the right inclined passage portion 434D.

  The main approach path of the game ball that enters the upper prize winning device 434 through the right flow down region 408 is a path E1 that passes through the left side of the right start winning device 432 and enters the approximate center of the entrance 434A. A game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 through this route E1 is greatly accelerated in the left inclined passage portion 434C because the moving distance along the left inclined passage portion 434C from the entry position to the back guide passage portion 434B is short. There is nothing. Accordingly, the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 through the route E1 temporarily passes the back guide passage portion 434B, moves to the right inclined passage portion 434D, and then returns to the back guide passage portion 434B. There is hardly any reciprocating motion in the left-right direction in the front, and the front guide passage portion 434B enters almost smoothly. When the player enters the top prize winning device 434 through the right flow down area 408, the time from when the game ball reaches the top entry restricting mechanism 454 until it is detected by the top prize winning switch 444 is about 0.2 seconds. . Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right flow area 408, the shortest firing interval at which the game ball is launched from the launching device 330 is approximately 0.6 seconds. If the game ball does not flow down accidentally significantly due to interference with the game, or the subsequent game ball does not flow down accidentally significantly faster, the top prize will be given after the preceding game ball reaches the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 A subsequent game ball does not reach the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 until it is detected by the switch 444.

  On the other hand, the main approach path of the game ball that enters the upper prize winning device 434 through the middle flow down area 409 is on the left side of the game ball that passes through the right flow down area 408 and enters the vicinity of the left end of the entrance 434A. It is. A game ball that has entered the upper grand prize winning device 434 through this route E2 rarely and smoothly enters the back guide passage portion 434B. However, the game ball reciprocates left and right in front of the back guide passage portion 434B and then guides the back. Enter the passage portion 434B. As a result, the time from when the game ball reaches the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 until it is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 is higher than when the player reaches the upper prize winning device 434 through the right falling area 408. Since the distance guided inside the device 434 is long, it becomes long to reciprocate left and right in front of the back guide passage portion 434B and then enter the back guide passage portion 434B, and in about 0.4 seconds. is there. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the middle downstream area 409, the shortest launch interval at which the game ball is launched from the launching device 330 is 0.6 seconds. A subsequent game ball does not reach the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 after reaching the mechanism 454 until it is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444. It should be noted that the time from when the game ball enters the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 until it is detected by the upper prize switch 444 is longer than when the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right side of the central structure 420. However, in order for the guide passage 424 to smoothly guide the game balls, the preceding game balls flow down accidentally much slower than the case where the game balls continue to be fired so as to flow down the right side of the central structure 420. Or the subsequent game ball will flow down much faster.

  The behavior and detection of a game ball that has entered the lower grand prize winning device 433 will be described. In the entry permission state of the lower prize-winning device 433, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is immersed backward, and the game ball can enter through the entrance 433A having a lateral width that is approximately five times the diameter of the game ball. In the lower prize-winning device 433, a central inclined passage part 433B inclined to the lower left for guiding the game ball to the lower big prize switch 443 and an upper left part of the central inclined passage part 433B are formed and inclined downward to the right. A left-side inclined passage portion 434C and a right-side inclined passage portion 434D that is formed on the right side of the central inclined passage portion 433B and inclined downward to the left are formed.

  A main approach route of the game ball that enters the lower prize-winning device 433 through the right flow down region 408 is a route E3. A game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 through this path E3 directly enters the central inclined passage part 433B, is guided leftward along the central inclined passage part 433B, and is detected by the lower big prize switch 443. . The time from when the game ball passes through the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 until it is detected by the lower big prize switch 443 is about 0.2 seconds.

  On the other hand, the main approach path of the game ball entering the lower grand prize winning device 433 through the midstream lower area 409 is a path E4. The game ball that has entered the lower grand prize winning device 433 through the route E4 is once guided to the right end side of the central inclined passage portion 433B by the left inclined passage portion 433C and then guided to the left along the central inclined passage portion 433B. It is detected by the lower prize winning switch 443. In this case, since the distance traveled from entering the lower prize-winning device 433 until reaching the lower prize-winning switch 443 is longer than that when reaching the lower big prize-winning device 433 through the right flow down area 408, the game ball Is longer than the lower entry control mechanism 453 until it is detected by the lower prize winning switch 443, and is approximately 0.4 seconds. It should be noted that even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right flow region 408, or the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the middle flow region 409, the shortest game ball is launched from the launching device 330. Since the firing interval is approximately 0.6 seconds, the subsequent game ball is restricted from entering the lower entry control mechanism 453 until the lower game winning switch 443 detects it. It does not pass through the mechanism 453.

<Game procedure in special game state>
Next, the game procedure in the special game state will be described. In order to allow the game balls to enter the upper prize apparatus 434 and the lower prize apparatus 433 through the right downstream area 408 in the permissible entry state of each round of the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433, the game ball with the maximum strength is used. Shoot out. In order to allow the game ball to flow down to the right flow down region 408, it is sufficient to launch at a strength of 75% or more of the maximum strength as described above, but even if a predetermined strength is selected from those strength ranges, Since the flow-down mode of the sphere hardly changes, there is no need to launch with a strength other than the maximum strength.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 479 arranged at the approximate center of the central structure 420 in the upper entry winning state of the upper winning device 434 and the lower winning device 433 in addition to the effects in the special game state. The number of remaining game balls up to the specified number (the number of remaining waiting for entry) and the remaining time in which the entry is allowed (allowable remaining time for entry) are notified. In addition, information for assisting optimal game progress is appropriately notified.

  The player, while monitoring the remaining waiting time for entry and the allowable entry time, launches the game ball at the maximum strength that causes the game ball to flow down through the right flow region 408, and lowers the game ball through the middle flow region 409. The timing to change to launch so as to flow down will be measured.

  Hereinafter, specific game progress will be described. When the special game state is started, the decorative symbol display device 479 is notified of information for instructing the game handle to flow down through the right flow area 408 by rotating the firing handle 252 with the maximum rotation operation amount. Further, when the launching handle 252 is appropriately operated to adjust the firing strength of the game ball at the time of launching the specified number of last game balls to enter the upper grand prize winning device 434 or the lower grand prize winning device 433, the privilege is received. It is notified that there is a possibility that Specifically, in order to receive a privilege, a game ball is allowed to enter the upper prize-winning device 434 or the lower major prize-winning device 433 until the remaining number reaches the specified number, and then flowed down through the middle downstream area 409. It is necessary to launch a game ball by reducing the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252, and then launch the game ball so that the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252 is returned to the maximum rotational operation amount to flow down through the right flow area 408. Is notified.

  The player rotates the firing handle 252 by the maximum amount of rotation and starts launching a game ball. First, one less game ball than the prescribed number is launched, and then the game ball launch is temporarily stopped. When at least one of the launched game balls does not enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, the game balls are additionally launched by the number that has not entered. Such launching is repeated as necessary, and the number of remaining waiting games is “1” until a game ball that is one ball less than the prescribed number enters the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433. Until this is repeated.

  When the number of remaining entry waits is “1”, the launch handle 252 is rotated so that the next game ball flows down through the middle flow down area 409 so that it is 50% or more and less than 75% of the maximum rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched by adjusting the operation amount, and the game ball is launched so that the next game ball flows down through the right flow area 408 continuously with the game ball. In the decorative symbol display device 479, when the number of remaining waiting for entry is “1”, if the allowable entry remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the above irregularities Not to perform a typical launch but to inform a normal launch. This is to prevent the occurrence of a situation where both of the two game balls cannot be reached while the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 are allowed to enter when irregularly launched. It is.

  Both the game ball that is launched in this way and flows down through the middle downstream area 409 and the game ball that flows down through the right downstream area 408 will enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower grand prize winning device 433 with high probability. .

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, when a game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream area 409, and a game ball that is launched at the shortest launch interval following the game ball is launched so as to flow down through the right downstream area 408. These game balls reach the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433 almost simultaneously at a high probability. Therefore, when the number of game balls that have entered the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433 is one more ball up to the specified number, if the launch adjustment as described above is performed, both of the game balls that have been launched are The player can enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 with high probability. This makes it possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the special game state. Thus, with the pachinko machine 100, the player can enjoy benefits such as an increase in the number of prize balls by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of a predetermined launch handle by the player (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball).

  Further, in the launch adjustment as described above, it is necessary to switch the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 252 by the player, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper big prize device 434 and the lower big prize device 433 in a special game state. The monotony of the game at the time of playing is reduced, and the gameability in the special game state is improved. In addition, before the launch adjustment as described above, in order to adjust the number of game balls entering the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433, it is necessary to temporarily stop the game ball launch. In addition, it is necessary to monitor the remaining open time of the upper winning device 434 and the lower winning device 433, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper winning device 434 and the lower winning device 433 in a special gaming state. The monotony of the game when it is played is reduced. Thereby, the gameability in the special game state is further improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the preceding game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 passes through a longer path than the subsequent game ball launched out of flow through the right flow down region 408. Since the shape of the guide passage is designed to reach the winning device 434 and the lower grand winning device 433, the game ball flowing down through the middle flow down region 409 and the game ball flowing down through the right flow down region 408 are substantially simultaneously. It is possible to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream area 409 has substantially the same minimum firing interval time as the game ball launched so as to flow down through the right downstream area 408. Since the shape of the guide passage is designed so as to reach the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, the amount of rotation operation of the launching handle can be reduced without stopping the game ball launching. If changed, these game balls can be made to reach the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 almost simultaneously. As a result, after the game ball has been launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409, the game ball is temporarily stopped, the flow situation of the game ball is judged, and the next game ball passes through the right flow down area 408. Compared with the case where the launching is resumed so as to flow down, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409 and the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409 are larger. It is possible to reach the vicinity of the winning device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 guides to the entrance 424A of the guide passage 424 almost smoothly even if it hits any position of the middle wall portion 423. Then, it is smoothly guided to the discharge port 424B through the guide passage 424. Further, the game balls released from the discharge port 424B are smoothly guided to those devices with a predetermined probability because the discharge port 424B is formed in the vicinity of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. The As a result, the game balls that are launched to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 pass through a longer path than the game balls that are launched through the right flow down region 408, and the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning. Although it reaches the device 433, the time lag from the launch from the launching device 330 to the arrival at the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 can be reduced, and the game ball flowing down through the middle downstream area 409 and the right The game balls flowing down through the flow down area 408 can enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 almost simultaneously.

  In addition, after launching to flow down through the middle downstream region 409, in order to change the launch so as to flow down through the right downstream region 408, the opposite configuration, that is, launching through the middle downstream region 409, was performed. The guide path so as to reach the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower grand prize winning device 433 earlier than the game ball launched so that the game ball flows down through the right flow down region 408 by approximately the same time as the shortest firing interval time. In the case where the shape is designed so that the launch is changed so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409 after being launched through the right downstream region 408, it is surely preceded. The game ball is caused to flow down through the middle flow area 409, and the subsequently launched game ball is flowed down through the right flow area 408. It can be. This is because when the game ball is caused to flow down through the right flow down region 408, the launch handle 252 may be rotated as much as possible. However, when the game ball is caused to flow down through the mid flow down region 409, the rotation of the launch handle 252 is sufficient. It is necessary to appropriately adjust the operation amount to an intermediate rotation operation amount. If the adjustment is wrong, the game ball is moved through the left flow area 407 even though the game ball is tried to flow through the middle flow area 409. This is because the game ball is caused to flow down or the game ball is caused to flow down through the right flow down region 408.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, since an operation necessary for enjoying the privilege and the timing of the operation are notified, an opportunity for obtaining a privilege can be given to all players, It can suppress giving a privilege only to a player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the main path and the part where the game balls launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream area 409 enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 flow down through the right downstream area 408. Since the game balls thus launched are different from the main paths and parts that enter the upper grand prize device 434 and the lower major prize device 433, these game balls are almost simultaneously at the upper grand prize device 434 and the lower major prize device 433. Even if it reaches the vicinity of, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game balls interfere with each other and do not enter the upper prize-winning device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433 almost simultaneously.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the time difference for each game ball until it reaches the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 after flowing down through the middle downstream area 409, in particular, the time delayed from the average time, It is configured to be smaller than the time difference for each game ball until it reaches the upper prize device 434 or the lower prize device 433 after flowing down through the right flow area 408, in particular, the time that is delayed from the average time, It is configured so that the time from when it flows down through the middle downstream area 409 and enters the upper prize device 434 or the lower prize apparatus 433 until it is detected by the upper prize switch 444 or the lower prize switch 443 becomes longer. Yes. As a result, even if it takes a little time for the game ball flowing down through the right flow down area 408 to reach the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, the game ball flows down through the middle flow down area 409. Before the game ball is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 or the lower prize winning switch 443 and the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 changes to the entry prohibited state, the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device. 433 can be entered.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the number of game balls exceeding a specified number in the special game state by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 252 by the player, that is, adjusting the launch strength (launch strength) of the game ball. Can enter the upper prize-winning device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433.

  Instead, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the player's launch handle 252 is placed on the upper right start winning device 731 provided at a position where a game ball launched at a constant launch speed cannot enter. It is configured to allow the game ball to enter by adjusting the amount of rotation operation. Then, by allowing the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731 under a predetermined condition, in the advantageous fluctuation state that is the gaming state after the special gaming state, the unit game fluctuation display in a predetermined fluctuation time. Is executed. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, a structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment.

  In addition, in FIG. 16, the outline external shape is shown about the main structures provided in a game area | region. Further, in the drawing of FIG. 16, for easy understanding, the position of the specific passage QA formed in the lower prize-winning device 433 is indicated with a letter “V”, and the non-specific passage QB. The character “N” is attached to the position of. FIG. 16 shows a distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls that have entered the lower grand prize winning device 433 to the specific passage QA or the non-specific passage QB, and the distribution mechanism is numbered “601”. A part of the game ball flowing down is shown for reference.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, an upper right start winning device 731 is provided on the right side of the game board 400 in place of the combination operating device 435. The upper right start winning device 731 is a starting device according to the first special symbol similar to the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B. The entrance portion of the game ball in the upper right start winning device 731 constitutes a winning port, and the game ball that has entered the winning port is a through-hole formed in the base body 401 like each winning device such as the right start winning device 432. And is guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401.

  The gaming board 400 is provided with an upper right start winning switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper right starting winning device 731. The upper right start winning switch is connected to the main control board 920 in the same manner as the switches such as the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B. Hereinafter, the upper right start winning switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper right start winning apparatus 731 will be described as an “upper right start winning switch 741” for convenience. When the upper right start winning switch 741 detects a game ball that has entered the upper right start winning device 731, the same as when the middle start winning switch 441 A, 441 B detects a game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 431 A, 431 B. The first special symbol will be the starting prize.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol can be reserved up to once. On the other hand, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is configured to be held up to four times in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16 also, the flow-down mode of game balls in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, a guide passage 711 is formed between the upper edge side of the central structure 420 and the outer rail 402. The game ball launched from the launching device 330 enters the guide passage 711 and passes through the guide passage 711, whereby the game ball is guided to the right game area where the upper right start winning device 731 and the like are provided.

  Therefore, a game that has been launched (launched) from the launching device 330 at a launch strength that can enter the guide passage 711 (that is, a launch strength that is stronger than the launch strength range for allowing the game ball to enter the left-flow region 407). The sphere enters the guide passage 711. The intensity range of the launch intensity that can enter the guide passage 711 is, for example, 45% or more of the maximum launch intensity.

  A right flow down area 708 and a middle flow down area 709 are connected to the guide passage 711. The game ball that has passed through the guide passage 711 enters the entrance 708A of the right flow down region 708 or the entrance 709A of the mid flow down region 709. A game ball that has entered the entrance 708A flows down the right flow area 708 through the path E5, and a game ball that has entered the entrance 709A flows down the middle flow area 709 through the path E6.

  Of the entrance 708A and the entrance 709A, the entrance 708A is located on the side farther from the center than the entrance 709A (that is, on the side farther from the return ball prevention mechanism 404). Of these, by launching the game ball from the launch device 330 in a predetermined first intensity range including the maximum launch intensity (for example, an intensity range of 75% or more of the maximum launch intensity), the game ball is input to the entrance 708A. To the right downstream area 708.

  On the other hand, firing is performed in a predetermined second intensity range (for example, a range of 45% or more of the maximum intensity and less than 75% of the maximum intensity) that is weaker than the first intensity range among the intensity ranges of the firing intensity that can enter the guide passage 711. By launching a game ball from the device 330, the game ball can enter the middle downstream area 709 from the entrance 709A.

  Therefore, the player rotates the shooting handle 252 with a predetermined first operation amount (first rotation operation amount) such that the shooting intensity of the game ball falls within the first intensity range, thereby causing the game ball to flow downward. The game ball can be moved into the area 708 by rotating the launch handle 252 with a predetermined second operation amount (second rotation operation amount) so that the launch strength of the game ball falls within the second strength range. Can enter the middle downstream area 709. In other words, the player can cause the game ball to flow down in the flow area intended by the player in the right flow area 708 or the middle flow area 709 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252.

  A game ball that flows down the right downstream region 708 or the middle downstream region 709 is routed when the game ball flowing down each of the downstream regions 708 and 709 is not interfered by other game balls in the confluence region 710 that can enter. It can flow downstream through E7. The game ball flowing down through the path E7 can enter the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, the upper large winning device 434, or the lower large winning device 433.

  On the other hand, when a game ball (for example, game ball P1) flowing down the right flow area 708 comes into contact with a game ball (for example, game ball P2) flowing down the middle flow area 708 in the merge area 710, the latter game ball The played game ball of the former can flow down to the downstream side through the path E8. When the game ball passes through the route E8, the game ball enters the upper right start winning device 731.

  The right-falling region 708 and the middle-falling region 709 are such that, after a game ball enters the middle-falling region 709 from the entrance 709A, the game ball fired from the launching device 330 in succession to the gaming ball is flown down from the entrance 708A. When entering the area 708, the game ball flowing down the right flow area 708 is configured to have a length that can contact the game ball flowing down the middle flow area 708 in the merge area 710.

  Therefore, after the player has launched a game ball from the launcher 330 with a launch strength in the second strength range, the player launches a subsequent game ball from the launcher 330 with a launch strength in the first strength range in succession to the game ball. Thus, the game ball can enter (win) the upper right start winning device 731. In other words, the game ball can enter the upper right start winning device 731 when the player intentionally adjusts the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  When the game is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100, first, as shown in FIG. 17, the normal game state is started. In the normal game state, the player generates a unit game right by starting a prize and executes the game with the expectation of winning a big hit. When the right of unit game is generated by the start winning, the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed and suspended, and the unit game big lottery for the special symbol is won. Then, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state. The determination as to whether or not the big hit lottery has been won is executed as a part of the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) for controlling the unit game related to the special symbol.

  In the special gaming state, for example, a large winning device (specifically, the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434) of approximately 30 seconds operate a predetermined number of times (specifically, five times). In the special game state, when the prize winning devices 433 and 434 are operated a predetermined number of times, the remaining unit game number is the upper limit number of unit games that can be executed in the advantageous variation state (specifically, three times). The gaming state is set to the advantageous variation state. Here, the advantageous fluctuation state is a gaming state that has shifted from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, and is configured so that the gaming ball easily enters the right start winning device 432, and the gaming ball easily enters the specific passage QA. This is a gaming state in which the operation pattern (pattern A) of the big winning device 433 is easily selected with high probability, and selection of the operation pattern will be described later.

  In the advantageous fluctuation state, the big prize device 433 operates based on the starting prize, and a big hit is generated when the game ball that has entered the lower big prize device 433 enters the specific passage QA. Therefore, the player is concerned with the start winning prize (mainly related to the second special symbol generated based on the entry to the right starting winning device 432 provided on the right side of the same gaming board 400 as the lower large winning device 433 in the advantageous fluctuation state. The game is executed by generating the right of the unit game by the start winning).

  In the advantageous variation state, either the pattern A or the pattern B is selected by lottery as the operation pattern of the lower large winning device 433 that operates based on the start winning. As will be described in detail later, pattern A is a pattern in which a game ball that has entered the lower grand prize winning device 433 is substantially guided to the specific passage QA, and pattern B is a game ball that has entered the lower major prize winning device 433. Is a pattern that is not substantially guided to the specific passage QA. In addition, the lottery (selection) of the operation pattern of the lower prize-winning device 433 is executed as a part of the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12). In this embodiment, the selection probabilities of the pattern A and the pattern B are Are set to 40% and 60%, respectively. Note that the selection probabilities of the pattern A and the pattern B may be different selection probabilities corresponding to the gaming state. In this case, the pattern A may be set more difficult to select in the normal gaming state than in the advantageous variation state. Preferably, only the pattern B may be selected in the normal gaming state that is not in the advantageous variation state, and the game ball may not enter the specific passage QA in the normal gaming state.

  In the advantageous fluctuation state, the unit game generated by the start winning is determined by stopping the special symbol according to the lottery result (that is, pattern A or pattern B) related to the operation pattern of the lower prize-winning device 433. After that, the lower prize-winning device 433 is operated with the operation pattern selected by the lottery (that is, the operation pattern corresponding to the fixed stop in the pattern A or the pattern B).

  When the lower prize-winning device 433 operates in the pattern A (mainly, when the lower prize-winning device 433 operates in the pattern A), the player handles the launch handle to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize-winning device 433. Operate 252 to fire a game ball. In the advantageous fluctuation state, as described above, when the game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 enters the specific passage QA, the big hit is generated. Therefore, in the advantageous fluctuation state, a big hit is generated with a probability that the pattern A is selected (that is, a probability of 40%) for one start winning.

  When a big hit occurs in the advantageous variation state, that is, when a game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 enters the specific passage QA, the advantageous variation state ends and the state shifts to the special game state. Note that the determination as to whether or not the game ball has entered the specific passage QA is a specific passage detected in the switch read processing S1209 (see FIG. 12) as part of the special symbol related processing S1217 (see FIG. 12). This is executed based on the detection state of the switch 448.

  In the advantageous fluctuation state, every time the unit game generated by the start winning is finished (that is, every time the special symbol is fixed and stopped), the remaining unit game number is decremented by 1 and the remaining unit game number becomes “0”. If no big hit has occurred, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the advantageous variation state, a big hit occurs with a probability of substantially 40% with respect to one start winning, so that the unit that can be executed in the advantageous variation state If the upper limit of the number of games is three, a big hit will occur with a probability of approximately 80% in the advantageous fluctuation state. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that once the big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the advantageous variation state is likely to continue, so that the interest of the game generating the big hit in the normal gaming state is improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, an operation pattern of the lower prize-winning device 433 executed in the advantageous variation state will be described. FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 in the advantageous fluctuation state. More specifically, FIG. 18A is a timing chart showing the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 operating with the pattern B, and FIG. 18B is the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 operating with the pattern A. It is a timing chart showing.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 according to the pattern B is started, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 shifts from the off state to the on state (time ta0) for a small period ( In this embodiment, the state returns to the off state after 0.06 seconds) (time ta1). Accordingly, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, but immediately after returning to the entry permission posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry prohibition posture.

  Similarly, when the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 according to the pattern B is started, the switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state (time ta0), but for a very short period (0.06 seconds in this embodiment). Later, it returns to the off state (time ta1). As a result, the distribution mechanism 601 (see FIG. 16) projects forward by immersing backward from a non-induction posture that guides the game ball to the non-specific passage QB without guiding it to the specific passage QA. The ball shifts to the guiding posture for guiding the sphere to the specific passage QA. However, after shifting to the guiding posture, the ball immediately returns to the non-guided posture.

  The switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state again after a predetermined period TA (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) after returning to the off state at time ta1 (time ta2). The switching solenoid 465 maintains the on state for a predetermined period TB (2.56 seconds in the present embodiment) from the time ta2, and then returns to the off state (time ta4).

  On the other hand, the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 shifts from the off state to the on state again after a predetermined period TC (3 seconds in the present embodiment) after returning to the off state at time ta1 (time ta3). It returns to the off state after a very short period (0.06 seconds in this embodiment) (time ta4). As a result, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 immediately returns to the entry prohibited posture after the transition from the entry prohibited posture to the permitted entry posture, just after the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 is started.

  A slight period (that is, a period from time ta0 to time ta1 and a period from time ta3 to time ta4) until the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is once turned on from the off state to return to the off state is It is set to a period during which the player can enter the lower prize-winning device 433 through the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 with very low probability.

  A small period (that is, a period from time ta0 to time ta1) until the switching solenoid 465 is once turned on from the off state to return to the off state is played during the minute period in which the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is on. Even if the ball can enter the lower grand prize-winning device 433, it is set to a period in which the game ball returns to the off state and ends before reaching the sorting mechanism 601.

  The period from when the switching solenoid 465 returns to the off state at the time ta1 to when the switching solenoid 465 is turned on again at the time ta2 (that is, the period TA) is the first minute period during which the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is in the on state ( In other words, even if the game ball can enter the lower prize-winning device 433 through the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 during the period from time ta0 to time ta1, the non-specific passage QB is placed on the game ball by the non-guided posture distribution mechanism 601. It is set to a period that can be guided to.

  Since the switching solenoid 465 returns to the off state at the time ta4, the game ball is in the upper entry restriction mechanism in the second minute period during which the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is in the on state (that is, the period from the time ta3 to the time ta4). Even if the player can enter the lower grand prize winning device 433 through 454, the game ball is guided to the non-specific passage QB by the distribution mechanism 601 in the non-guide posture.

  Therefore, the game ball enters the lower grand prize winning device 433 in the two very small periods when the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is in the ON state (that is, the period from time ta0 to time ta1 and the period from time ta3 to time ta4). Even if it enters, the game ball is substantially guided not to the specific passage QA but to the non-specific passage QB.

  In this way, when the lower prize-winning device 433 operates in the pattern B, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned on only for a very short period, so the probability that the game ball will enter the lower prize-winning device 433 is low. In addition, even if a game ball enters the lower grand prize device 433, the game ball is not substantially guided to the specific passage QA.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 according to the pattern A is started, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 shifts from the off state to the on state, thereby causing the upper entry restriction. The mechanism 454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture (time td0). The upper entry restriction solenoid 464 maintains the on state for a predetermined period (3.64 seconds in the present embodiment) after shifting to the on state, and returns to the off state at time td4 (time td4).

  In other words, when the lower prize-winning device 433 operates in the pattern A, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 has changed from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture because the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 has turned on at time td0. Until the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 returns to the OFF state at the time td4, the approach allowable posture is maintained.

  On the other hand, the switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state when the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 starts (time td0) as in the case of the pattern B described above. .06 seconds), and then returns to the off state (time td1). The switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state again after a predetermined period TA after returning to the off state at time td1 (time td2). The switching solenoid 465 returns to the off state after being kept on for a predetermined period TB from time td2 (time td3).

  Thereby, based on the cooperative operation at time td0 to time td3 of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (upper entry restriction mechanism 454) and the switching solenoid 465 (sorting mechanism 601), Guided to a specific path QA or guided to a non-specific path QB.

  Here, the period TB is set to have a time length sufficiently longer than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment). Therefore, when the lower prize-winning device 433 operates in the pattern A, at least one of the game balls that have entered the lower prize-winning device 433 is as long as the game ball continues to be appropriately fired (launched) from the launching device 330. However, it is almost always guided to the specific passage QA in the period TB.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the specific passage QA of the lower prize winning device 433 and a big hit occurs in an advantageous fluctuation state that shifts after the special game state ends, The state is configured to transition to the special gaming state again. In particular, since the probability of jackpot occurrence in the advantageous variation state is set as high as about 80%, once the big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the advantageous variation state is likely to continue.

  On the other hand, since it is a continuation condition that the game ball is allowed to enter the specific passage QA of the lower prize-winning device 433 in the advantageous fluctuation state, the player has the pattern A in the lower-large prize winning device 433 in the advantageous fluctuation state. It is determined whether the special symbol is confirmed or not, and when the lower prize-winning device 433 operates in the pattern A, the firing handle 252 is continuously operated so that the game ball enters the lower prize-winning device 433 (game) Need to keep firing the ball).

  In view of the fact that the unit game related to the special game state and the special symbol automatically ends with the passage of time, if a big hit occurs in the normal game state, the player will receive a privilege (i.e., relatively Unless the high probability of occurrence of big jackpots is abandoned by itself, it will be in a situation in which it is impossible to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100 in which it plays until the advantageous fluctuation state ends.

  In response to such a problem, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of times the unit game right is reserved according to the first special symbol and the number of times the unit game right is reserved according to the second special symbol are determined according to a predetermined condition (hereinafter, referred to as the following). When this condition is referred to as “long fluctuation occurrence condition”), the fluctuation display of the unit game to be executed next time is a period longer than the fluctuation time predetermined for the fluctuation display, It is configured to execute with a variable time of a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) that allows the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100.

  Thereby, the player delays the fixed stop timing (that is, the display timing of the stop symbol) in the unit game variation display to be executed next time from the initial timing by establishing the long variation occurrence condition as necessary. Therefore, it is possible to leave the pachinko machine 100 during the unit game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even after a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the pachinko machine 100 does not give up the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, a relatively high occurrence probability of the big hit). It is possible to leave.

  In addition, in the state where the long variation occurrence condition is not satisfied, the variation time in the variation display of each unit game is set to a different length depending on whether or not the big hit lottery for that unit game is successful, Although it is set longer than the case where it is not won, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the big hit lottery for the next unit game is successful The variation display of the unit game is executed in a specific period. That is, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the player can leave the pachinko machine 100 without giving up the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state regardless of whether or not the big hit lottery for the next unit game is successful. .

  In addition, when the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, the maximum period (for example, for example, the period of 15 to 60 seconds) of the variation display period of each unit game in the state where the long variation occurrence condition is not satisfied (for example, A specific period sufficiently longer than the period of 60 seconds) is set, and this length is preferably about twice or more, and about 5 times or more the maximum length of the variable display of each unit game. Is preferred.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of times of the unit game rights related to the first special symbol is 1 and the number of times of the unit game rights related to the second special symbol is 4 times. In some cases, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is established.

  In the special gaming state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the game area on the right side of the game board 400 so that the game ball enters the lower grand prize device 433 or the upper major prize device 434. Therefore, in the special game state and the advantageous variation state, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol generated based on the game ball entering the right start winning device 432 is easily held.

  Therefore, the player who plays the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can satisfy the long fluctuation generation condition by causing the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731 during the special game state. Alternatively, the long fluctuation occurrence condition can be established by causing the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731 during the advantageous fluctuation state.

  When the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the main control board 920 displays the first special symbol so that the next unit game executed in the display control process S1219 becomes a fluctuation display for a specific period (for example, 5 minutes). Alternatively, the operation control of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 related to the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 940 performs operation control so that the decorative symbol display device 479 performs display synchronized with the change display of a specific period controlled by the main control board 920.

  As the display performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, the normal decorative symbol variation display executed before and after the specific period is started, that is, the decorative symbol display A scroll display of a plurality of numeric strings performed at the center of the screen of the device 479 may be used, and a display other than the normal display of the decorative symbols may be displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  When a display other than the decorative symbol variation display is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed. You may make it display the change display of a symbol small in the corner (for example, lower right corner) of the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 479. FIG.

  In the case where a display other than a normal decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter also referred to as a predetermined screen display) is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the predetermined screen display is displayed. It is configured to display during a specific period, and at the end of the specific period, to confirm and stop a normal-sized decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a size displayed in the variable display of the normal decorative symbol) according to the result of the big hit lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured to return (return) from a predetermined screen display to a normal decorative pattern change display in the middle of a specific period.

  In the middle of a specific period, the system is configured to return from the predetermined screen display to the normal display of the decorative symbols, so that the lottery result of the big hit lottery (the lottery result related to the operation pattern of the lower prize-winning device 433) is confirmed and stopped. It becomes possible for the player to fully recognize the process in which is displayed.

  In addition, in the configuration that returns to the normal decorative symbol variation display in the middle of the specified period, the original decorative symbol variation display in the unit game being executed (that is, the normal variation when the long variation occurrence condition is not met) (Decorative display of decorative symbols) may be configured to be executed from the beginning of the variable display, or the original decorative symbols in the unit game being executed from a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds before) from the end of the specific period. It is good also as a structure which performs the final stage part including the fixed stop part in the fluctuation display of. In the case of a configuration in which the variable display is executed from the beginning, the variable display may be started from the decorative symbol that has been confirmed and stopped in the previous unit game, or a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, “1,2, , 3 ”combination), the variable display may be started.

  In the configuration that returns from a predetermined screen display to a normal decorative symbol variation display in the middle of a specific period, before returning to the normal decorative symbol variation display, in order to notify the timing to return, A predetermined countdown display (for example, numbers corresponding to the remaining time are sequentially displayed) may be performed on the symbol display device 479. Thereby, the player can be notified of the timing at which the normal decorative symbol variation display is started, and the player can expect the final stoppage of the lottery result to be displayed in the future. As the countdown display, it may be displayed periodically during a specific period, for example, every 30 seconds, or may be displayed finely before the return, for example, every 10 seconds before 10 seconds. .

  In accordance with the countdown display or in place of the countdown display, a display prompting the player to prepare for the game ball to enter the lower prize-winning device 433 that operates after the special symbol is stopped (hereinafter, referred to as “the game ball”). This display may be referred to as “launch preparation display”) on the decorative symbol display device 479. Such a launch preparation display may be configured to display whether the lottery result relating to the operation pattern of the lower prize-winning device 433 is either the pattern A or the pattern B. It is preferable to execute at least the pattern A in which a big hit in the state occurs (that is, the game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 is substantially always guided to the specific passage QA). It is preferable that the display prompts an operation corresponding to the hitting game technique (for example, “right strike preparation”).

  In addition, during the execution of the special symbol variation display, no player, including the player, can advance the game, so when the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, the variation time of the special symbol variation display is predetermined. The book has a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the fluctuation time (that is, the fluctuation time until the stop display is displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied) According to the pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment, even if the player leaves the seat during the fluctuation display of the specific period, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding arbitrarily by another customer who is a third party while leaving the seat. it can. As a result, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the player can leave the seat without worrying about the arbitrary progress of the game by other customers during the fluctuation display period of the specific period. .

  Here, when a predetermined screen display (that is, a display other than the normal decorative symbol variation display) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the player displays the predetermined screen display. It is good also as a structure which includes the separable information corresponding to the separable state which can be seized.

  For example, with the start of variable display for a specific period, as shown in FIG. 19, a small decorative symbol Z is displayed variably at the right corner of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and approximately at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. By displaying the character string of “Available to leave” as the awayability information J, it is possible to inform the player that the safety is high even if the user leaves the seat. In this way, by displaying the away-seatable information J on the decorative symbol display device 479, the player can know the time when he / she can safely leave the seat based on the away-away information.

  In addition, the away-seatable information J is not limited to the character string “separable”, but other than “separable”, a character string indicating the content corresponding to the state where the player can leave the seat. It may be a still image such as a picture showing the content, or a moving image such as an animation. Further, the away-seatable information J does not necessarily have to be substantially at the center of the screen with the space opened by displaying the decorative design Z small, and is displayed in the open space on the screen on which the normal decorative design is variably displayed. It may be a configuration.

  Further, since the special symbol display is also performed on the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the decorative symbol Z is displayed on the screen when the awayable information J is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. It is good also as a structure which does not. That is, the display device that displays the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) and the display device that displays the away-seatable information J may be different. In addition, a dedicated display device that displays the display of the away-seatable information J may be provided separately from the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Further, when the variation display is performed for a long variation time based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, an effect device such as the decorative symbol display device 479 is urged to input to the input operation device 260. The pachinko machine 100 may recognize the presence / absence of the player depending on whether or not an input operation is performed on the display, and the game is displayed in the latter half of the variable display or during a certain period of time near the end. If the presence of the player cannot be confirmed, the seating information by a predetermined voice such as “Please return to the seat” is output to the player, or the data display device (not shown) or the management device (not shown) The absence information corresponding to the absence of the player may be output to an external device such as the above. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the game from proceeding while the change display is finished in a state where the player leaves the seat and the player leaves the seat thereafter.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the special symbol fluctuation display is performed in a relatively long specific period (for example, 5 minutes). Thus, it is possible for the player to leave the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the profit obtained by the advantageous fluctuation state, but by using the specific period, the player's mood is reset (switched) It is also possible to

  For example, when the display performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition is a display other than the decorative symbol variable display, the display (display other than the decorative symbol variable display) ) As a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset), it is possible to reset the player's mood when viewing the screen display.

  As an example of a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized, the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset) by operating the power switch 909 or the initialization switch 907. The screen display (moving image or still image) of the initial screen that is actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 can be exemplified, or the power switch 909 is turned off and the screen is blackened. A screen display including the same or substantially the same display can be exemplified.

  Alternatively, as another example of the predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized, a character string (for example, “reset in progress”) that reminds the pachinko machine 100 to be initialized. And a pseudo initial screen formed by displaying a character string), a symbol, a picture, or the like on a lighted background.

  In this way, as a display performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, an initial screen displayed at the time of actual initialization or a screen display of a pseudo initial screen is displayed. By using a screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset), the player can feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized during a specific period. Thereby, it is possible to reset the mood of the player who has played a game with the pachinko machine 100. Then, by resetting the player's mood during the specific period, the player can renew the mood and enter the game after the end of the specific period.

  Alternatively, when the display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition is to be a display other than the decorative symbol variable display, the display (display other than the decorative symbol variable display) ) As a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered a standby state, it is possible to reset the player's mood when viewing the screen display.

  An example of a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered a standby state is a so-called “customer waiting effect” (that is, when the pachinko machine 100 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time). In addition, an effect display that is not related to the gaming state, such as a title display or a demo display, displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 can be exemplified.

  In this way, as a display performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 for a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, the player is as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered the standby state, such as a customer waiting effect. By using the screen display to feel, it is possible to make the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been switched to a standby state that is not playing during a specific period, thereby playing a game on the pachinko machine 100 The player's mood can be reset. Then, by resetting the player's mood during the specific period, the player can renew the mood and enter the game after the end of the specific period.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the probability of jackpot in the advantageous fluctuation state is set as high as about 80%, and the advantageous fluctuation state is easy to continue. With a probability of approximately 20%, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state after the advantageous fluctuation state. Therefore, sometimes even if a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, it may continue to return to the normal gaming state after the advantageous fluctuation state, in such a case, the player feels boring the game and reduces the willingness to play There was a risk of it.

  In response to such a problem, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 for a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition is used. It is possible to reset the mood. Therefore, if the player continues to return to the normal gaming state even after shifting to the advantageous variation state, the player intentionally adjusts the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252 to establish the long variation occurrence condition, thereby enabling the specific period. After the completion of the game, it is possible to renew its own mood and play the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming motivation due to the inability to receive a privilege in an advantageous fluctuation state. In this case, the launch handle 252 functions as an operation unit for performing a pseudo reset operation for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display an image capable of resetting the player's feelings.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player places the game ball on the upper right start winning device 731 in a situation in which the number of unit gaming rights related to the second special symbol is four times during the special gaming state. By making it enter, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the unit game to be executed next time can be set to a period (specific period) longer than a predetermined fluctuation time. Thus, the player can leave the pachinko machine 100 during the unit game executed in a specific period, and therefore abandons the privilege (that is, the probability of occurrence of a relatively large jackpot) in the advantageous fluctuation state. At least it is possible to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100.

  In order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right starting prize winning device 731, after the game ball is launched from the launch device 330 with the launch strength in the second strength range, the subsequent game ball is continuously given the first strength after the game ball. It is necessary to launch from the launcher 330 with a range of launch intensities. Therefore, in order to establish the long fluctuation occurrence condition that enables the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100, the player needs to intentionally adjust the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252. It is possible to reduce the monotony of a game performed by firing a game ball from 330. Further, in order to establish the long fluctuation occurrence condition, the player's skill is also required to some extent, and in this respect also, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game performed by firing the game ball from the launching device 330. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is initialized (reset) as a display performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 for a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition. By using the screen display that the player feels or the screen display that the player feels as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered the standby state, the player's mood can be reset (switched). Therefore, the player can reduce the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 in a situation where the flow of the game in the advantageous game state is less favorable than the normal game state, such as continuing to return to the normal game state even after shifting to the advantageous fluctuation state. Adjusting intentionally (that is, performing a pseudo reset operation on the launch handle 252) and satisfying the long fluctuation occurrence condition, so that the player can renew his / her mood and enter the game after the end of the specific period. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the inability to receive a privilege in an advantageous fluctuation state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a change display is performed for a specific period (a period longer than the change time when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not established) based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, By displaying the separable information J corresponding to the separable state that can be seized, it is possible to inform the player of the time when it is possible to safely leave the seat, thereby allowing the player to leave the seat with confidence.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment, when a player plays a game using the right-handed game technique during the special game state, whether a lot of game balls enter the upper grand prize winning device 434 sensuously. In order to be able to give such an impression to the player, the ball passage formed in the right game area that can be entered through the right flow area 708 or the middle flow area 709 has been devised. In the following description, the same components as those in the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 20, while showing the outline external shape about the main structures provided in the game board 400, the board part of the front was cut off about the middle start winning device 831 and the general winning device 439B. It is shown as a cross-sectional view, and cross-sectional hatching is omitted in the cross-sectional view. Further, in FIG. 20, a part of the game ball P flowing down is shown for reference.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 20, the main structural configuration of the game board 400 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the game board 400 of the present embodiment, the middle start winning device 831 is disposed below the central structure 420. The middle start winning device 831 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle starting winning device 831A and the right middle starting winning device 831B) are integrated. The left middle start winning device 831A is a start device according to the first special symbol, and the right middle start winning device 831B is a start device according to the second special symbol. That is, the medium start winning device 831 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

  The middle start winning device 831 includes a distribution mechanism 831D that mechanically distributes the game balls to the left and right by operating the game balls that have entered from the entrance 831C in a seesaw shape using the weight of the game balls. Each time the game ball enters from the entrance 831C, the distribution mechanism 831D alternately distributes the game ball to the left ball passage or the right ball passage. The left spherical passage that is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D is configured as a passage that extends downward from the top and then extends to the back side (rear side). The right spherical passage that is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D is also configured as a passage that extends downward from the top and then extends to the back side.

  In the left ball passage that is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D, a discharge port through which the game ball flowing down the left ball passage is discharged to the outside of the middle start winning device 831 with a low probability bends to the back side. The entrance portion of the left middle start winning device 831A is provided downstream of the discharge port. On the other hand, in the right ball passage, which is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D, a discharge port through which the game balls flowing down the right ball passage are discharged out of the middle start winning device 831 with a low probability is on the back side. And an inlet portion of the right middle start winning device 831B is provided downstream of the discharge port.

  Therefore, the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 831 may be discharged to the game area with a low probability before entering the left middle start winning device 831A or the right middle start winning device 831B. The left middle start winning device 831A or the right middle start winning device 831B is alternately entered. The entrance portion of the game ball of the left middle start winning device 831A constitutes a winning opening of the left middle start winning device 831A, and the entrance portion of the game ball of the right middle start winning device 831B is the right middle start winning device 831B. Construct a winning opening.

  The game board 400 is provided with a left middle start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 831A, and a right middle start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 831B. It has been. The left middle start winning switch and the right middle start winning switch are the same switches as the start winning switches 441A, 441B, 442 (see FIG. 10), and are connected to the main control board 920.

  When the left middle start winning switch detects the game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 831A, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B has detected the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 431A, 431B (see FIG. 7). As with the case, the first special symbol start prize is awarded. On the other hand, when the right middle start winning switch detects a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 831B, and when the right start winning switch 442 detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). Similarly, it will be a start prize for the second special symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a guide passage 711 similar to that of the second embodiment is formed between the upper edge side of the central structure 420 and the outer rail 402, and a player can play a game ball. By rotating the firing handle 252 so as to enter the right flow down region 708 or the middle flow down region 709 via the guide passage 711, the game ball enters the game region on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 (ie, right-handed game Play games).

  A right sphere passage 810 extending immediately above the upper prize winning device 434 is connected to the downstream side of the right downstream area 708 and the middle downstream area 709. The right sphere passage 810 includes a right upper passage portion 810A that is provided on the downstream side of the right downstream region 708 and the middle downstream region 709, a right middle passage portion 810B that is provided on the downstream side of the upper right passage portion 810A, The lower right passage portion 810C is provided on the downstream side of the passage portion 810B and extends to the upper prize winning device 434.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the right sphere passage 810 has an upper right passage portion 810A and a lower right passage portion 810C that are thicker than the right middle passage portion 810B among the passage portions constituting the right sphere passage 810. It is comprised so that it may have at least the area which continues in a direction. That is, the right middle passage portion 810B is configured to have a narrower passage portion than the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C. Thus, the right sphere passage 810 is configured as a constricted shape in the right middle passage portion 810B. Further, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C are configured to be longer in the vertical direction than the width in the left-right direction, and a thick passage portion is long and continuous in the vertical direction.

  A branch passage 820 serving as a branch passage for the lower right passage portion 810C is connected to the right end side of the right middle passage portion 810B. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 through the right flow lower region 708 and the middle flow lower region 709 enters the right middle passage portion 810B via the upper right passage portion 810A, and the lower right passage portion in the right middle passage portion 810B. It branches into either 810C or the branch passage 820 and flows down.

  Of the nails 411 erected on the game board 400, the two nails 411A and 411B arranged in the right middle passage portion 810B serve as branch openings to the branch passage 820 (that is, the entrance of the branch passage 820). Function. Such a branch port is vertically oriented around a line segment having a maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game area formed on the game board 400 (for example, a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction). Are provided on the right end side in the region of the predetermined width (that is, the end side where the right ball passage 810 is formed in the game board 400).

  In addition, as an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction centering on a line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game area, for example, centering on a line segment crossing the center of the game area in the left-right direction It may be a region having a vertical width set to about 8 cm or less in the vertical direction, preferably about 4 cm or less, and more preferably about 2 cm or less.

  Alternatively, as an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction centering on a line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game area, for example, centering on a line segment crossing the center of the game area in the left-right direction, It is preferable that the area has a vertical width that is set to be approximately 25% or less of a line segment (hereinafter referred to as “the height of the gaming area”) that extends vertically through the center of the gaming area. It is preferably an area with a vertical width that is set to a length of about 15% or less of the height of the game area, centering on a line segment that crosses the center in the left-right direction, and a line that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferable that the area has a vertical width that is set to be equal to or less than about 5% of the height of the game area centered on the minutes.

  In the upper right passage portion 810A, a combination operation device 435 and a starter 436 are integrally configured to provide a device (passage detection device) that detects the passage of a game ball, and the passage detection devices 435 and 436 are The right upper passage portion 810A is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction. The passage detection devices 435 and 436 are provided with a switch for detecting the passage of the game ball in which the above-described combination operation switch 445 and the start switch 446 (see FIG. 10) are configured by one switch. In addition, the combination operation device 435 and the start device 436 may be provided separately, and the combination operation switch 445 and the start switch 446 may also be provided separately.

  In the lower right passage portion 810C, a general winning device 439C is provided on the upper large winning device 434 side from half of the height of the upper right passage portion 810A, at a position close to the left side in the upper right passage portion 810A. ing. For example, the height of the upper right passage portion 810A may simply use the distance between the highest position and the lowest position, or from the entrance to the upper right passage portion 810A and the upper right passage portion 810A. You may utilize the distance between the exit from which a game ball is discharged | emitted. When there are a plurality of entrances that can enter the upper right passage portion 810A or outlets through which the game balls are discharged from the upper right passage portion 810A, a predetermined entrance or exit (for example, the highest position) of the plurality of entrances or exits. (Inlet) may be used, or a position in the middle of a plurality of inlets or outlets may be used.

  Similar to the general winning devices 439A and 439B described above, the general winning device 439C is a winning device in which a certain number of game balls are paid out as winning balls without receiving a winning / losing lottery when winning. The entrance portion of the game ball of the general winning device 439C constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball that has entered the winning port is a collection discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. Z)).

  The game board 400 is provided with a general winning switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning device 439C. The general winning switch is a general winning switch similar to the general winning switches 449A and 449B and is connected to the main control board 920. When the general winning switch detects a game ball that has entered the general winning device 439C, the general winning device becomes a winning in the same manner as when the general winning switch 449A, 449B detects a game ball that has entered the general winning device 439A, 439B. A number of game balls set for 439C are paid out as prize balls.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20, a game area on the right side of the middle start winning apparatus 831 and on the left side of the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 (hereinafter, this game area is simply referred to as “the game area on the left side of the lower prize-winning apparatus 433”). Are provided with a general winning device 439B and a lower right starting winning device 832.

  The lower right start winning device 832 is a starting device according to the second special symbol, similar to the right start winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). The entrance portion of the game ball of the lower right starting winning device 832 constitutes a winning port, and the gaming ball that has entered the winning port is guided through the through hole formed in the base body 401 to the recovery / discharge passage.

  The lower right starting winning device 832 moves between an opening which is a winning opening formed in the game board 400 and an allowed entry posture and an entry prohibited posture, so that a game ball enters the opening (winning mouth). And an entry restriction mechanism 852 that changes the probability. The entry restricting mechanism 852 includes a thin plate-like movable piece driven by a solenoid, and the movable piece has a support surface (plate surface) that supports the lower side of the game ball and guides it to the rear winning port. Is inserted into the opening of the lower right starting winning device 832.

  The solenoid that drives the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 852 is composed of a solenoid that is connected to the main control board 920 in the same manner as the right entry restriction solenoid 462, but is composed of electrical drive means other than the solenoid. Alternatively, it may be configured by a mechanically operated mechanism represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered the predetermined area.

  When the entry restricting mechanism 852 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece is placed in the opening of the lower right start winning device 832 so that the movable piece is opened to the lower right start winning device 832 (winning port). ) To prevent game balls from entering. Accordingly, when the entry restriction mechanism 852 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower right start winning device 832. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 852 is in the entry prohibition posture, even if there is a game ball heading for the lower right start winning device 832, the game ball does not enter the lower right start winning device 832 and starts lower right. It flows down through the front of the winning device 832 to the downstream side.

  On the other hand, when the approach restricting mechanism 852 is in the approach permitting posture, the movable piece is disposed so as to protrude from the opening of the lower right start winning device 832 so that the movable piece receives the game ball flowing down from above and is opened. Guide to (winning entrance). Accordingly, when the entry restriction mechanism 852 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball can enter the lower right start winning device 832.

  The game board 400 is provided with a lower right start winning switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower right starting winning device 832. The lower right start winning switch is the same switch as the above right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), and is connected to the main control board 920.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the game area of the right side with respect to the center structure 420 in the pachinko machine 100 of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment.

  FIG. 21 shows a schematic outer shape of main structures provided in the game area. Further, the opening 210A (see FIG. 1) of the front decorative body 210 of the front block 102 covering the front of the game board 400 is not a simple straight line, but in FIG. 21, for easy understanding, The outer edge of the opening 210A is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 21, the main flow path of the game ball in the game area on the right side is shown by arrows.

  As described above, in the game area on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the right ball passage 810 is provided at a position downstream of the right flow down area 708 and the middle flow down area 709 and upstream of the top prize winning device 434. It has been.

  The game ball that has entered the upper right passage portion 810A from the right downstream region 708 or the middle downstream region 709 flows downstream through a plurality of downstream routes according to the arrangement of the nails 411 disposed in the upper right passage portion 810A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the flow path of the game ball in the upper right passage portion 810A is roughly divided into a path that passes through the passage detection devices 435 and 436 toward the passage detection devices 435 and 436, and a passage detection device 435. There are three systems: a route that passes through the right side of 436 and a route that passes through the left side of the passage detection devices 435 and 436. Each path passing through the right and left sides of the passage detection devices 435 and 436 is further subdivided by the arrangement of the nails 411.

  As described above, the upper right passage portion 810A is roughly configured as a thick passage portion including three downflow paths, so that the game ball that has entered the upper right passage portion 810A flows down one of the three downflow paths. It flows down to the downstream side while scattering in the left-right direction.

  All game balls that have passed through the upper right passage portion 810A enter the right middle passage portion 810B. As described above, the right middle passage portion 810B has a narrower passage portion than the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C, thereby functioning as a spherical passage including a constricted portion in the right sphere passage 810. Therefore, the game balls scattered in the right and left direction in the upper right passage portion 810A flow down so as to be collected in the left and right direction in the right middle passage portion 810B.

  A game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B enters the lower right passage portion 810C or the branch passage 820. More specifically, among the nails 411 disposed in the ball passage 810, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B is between the nail 411B and the nail 411C or between the nail 411C and the nail 411D. When it passes, the game ball enters the lower right passage portion 810C. On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B passes between the nail 411A and the nail 411B among the nails 411 arranged in the right middle passage portion 810B, the game ball enters the branch passage 820. enter in.

  That is, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B does not enter the branch passage 820 by passing between the nail 411B and the nail 411C or between the nail 411C and the nail 411D. Enter the passage 810C. Therefore, between the nail 411B and the nail 411C and between the nail 411C and the nail 411D is an opening that functions as an entrance to the lower right passage portion 810C.

  In addition, as described above, between the nail 411A and the nail 411B is an opening that functions as an entrance to the branch passage 820 (that is, a branch opening to the branch passage 820), and the game flows down the right middle passage portion 810B. By passing between the nail 411A and the nail 411B, the ball always enters the branch passage 820 without entering the lower right passage portion 810C.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D constitute a part of a nail row arranged to be inclined downward toward the right toward the entrance to the branch passage 820 (the branch port to the branch passage 820). . Therefore, the nail row descending to the right including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D forms a boundary between the right middle passage portion 810B and the lower right passage portion 810C, and guides the game ball to the branch passage 820 in the lower right direction. Acts as a guiding nail.

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B is directed to the branch passage 820 along the nail row including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D at the boundary between the right middle passage portion 810B and the right lower passage portion 810C. Flows in the lower right direction, or passes between the nail 411B and the nail 411C, or between the nail 411C and the nail 411D, and flows in a direction intersecting with the row of the nail row to enter the lower right passage portion 810C. To do.

  The game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C from the right middle passage portion 810B flows down to the downstream side through a plurality of downward passages according to the arrangement of the nails 411 arranged in the lower right passage portion 810C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the flow path of the game balls in the lower right passage portion 810C is roughly divided into a path that enters the general winning device 439C toward the general winning device 439C, and passes the right side of the general winning device 439C. And a route passing through the left side of the general winning device 439C. Each route passing through the right side of the general winning device 439C is further subdivided by the arrangement of the nails 411.

  As described above, the lower right passage portion 810C is also configured as a thick passage portion including three flow-down passages in the same manner as the upper right passage portion 810A. Therefore, the games gathered in the right and left direction in the right middle passage portion 810B. The sphere flows down to the downstream side while scattering again in the left-right direction in the lower right passage portion 810C.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the game balls flowing down the lower right passage portion 810C are arranged side by side in the left-right direction at the most downstream side in the lower right passage portion 810C and immediately above the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434. A space between the nail 411 (411E) serves as an outlet, and is discharged from the outlet. The outlet of the lower right passage portion 810C formed by the nail 411E is arranged in a range narrower than the entrance (the length in the left-right direction) of the entrance prize of the upper prize winning device 434.

  Accordingly, the game ball flowing down the lower right passage portion 810C is discharged from directly above the entrance in a range narrower than the entrance of the upper prize device 434, so that the upper prize device 434 is in an entry-permitted state. In this case, all the game balls discharged from the lower right passage portion 810C enter the upper prize winning device 434. That is, the game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C when the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry-permitted state, except when entering the general prize winning device 439C disposed upstream of the upper prize winning device 434, All of them can enter the top prize winning device 434.

  When the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry prohibition state, the game ball that has flowed down the lower right passage portion 810C to the upper major prize winning device 433 does not enter the upper grand prize winning device 434 and does not enter the upper grand prize winning device 433. Flow down. At this time, if the lower prize-winning device 433 is in the approach-permitted posture, the game ball can enter the lower prize-winning device 433. On the other hand, if the lower prize-winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the player enters the game area on the left side of the lower big prize-winning device 433 through the upper portion of the lower prize-winning device 433.

  The branch passage 820 is configured as a spherical passage that passes through the right side of the upper prize winning device 434 and extends substantially linearly in a vertical direction to a position below the upper prize winning device 434. Thereby, a game ball that has entered the branch passage 820 rarely enters between the lower right passage portion 810C and the upper prize winning device 434 from the opening 820A formed on the upstream side of the upper prize winning device 434. Basically, it passes through the right side of the top prize winning device 434 and flows down without giving an opportunity to enter the top prize winning device 434. In other words, when the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B enters the branch passage 820, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is basically lost.

  A game ball that has flowed down the right side of the upper prize winning device 434 through the branch passage 820 can enter the lower prize winning device 433 when the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry-permitted state. On the other hand, if the lower prize-winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the player enters the game area on the left side of the lower big prize-winning device 433 through the upper portion of the lower prize-winning device 433.

  A game ball that has entered the game area on the left side of the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 through the upper prize-winning apparatus 433 can enter the general prize-winning device 439B or the lower right starting prize-winning apparatus 832 disposed in the game area. is there. When a game ball that has entered the game area on the left side of the lower prize-winning device 433 cannot enter any of these winning devices 439B and 832, the game ball enters the discharge port 401A and the discharge port 401A. To the recovery discharge passage.

  Most of the branch passage 820 is located on the outer side of the opening 210A of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102 except for the vicinity of the nail 411A and the nail 411B constituting the branch opening to the branch passage 820. That is, most of the branch passage 820 is provided at a position overlapping the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction.

  The branch passage 820 is such that at least when a game ball completely enters the branch passage 820, at least a part of the game ball overlaps with the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction (that is, the remaining part is the front face). It is preferable that most of the branch passage 820 is provided so as to overlap the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction so as not to overlap the decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction.

  At this time, as “when the game ball has completely entered the branch passage 820”, as shown in FIG. 21, the surface where the game ball P constitutes a branch opening to the branch passage 820 (an entrance to the branch passage 820). That is, when the player fully enters the tangential plane on the central side of the game board 400 common to the nail 411A and the nail 411B (that is, when the game ball P that has entered the branch passage 820 contacts the surface). Alternatively, it may be the time when the game ball enters the branch passage 820 to a position where it cannot return to the right middle passage portion 810B.

  In addition, it is preferable that most of the game balls that have entered the right middle passage portion 810B enter the lower right passage portion 810C and only a little enter the branch passage 820, and a game that has entered the right middle passage portion 810B. It is preferable that approximately 70% or more of the sphere enter the lower right passage portion 810C, preferably approximately 80% or more, and more preferably approximately 90% or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the game area on the left side of the lower prize-winning device 433 in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 22 is a partially enlarged front view of the lower right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 22, the outline external shape is shown about the main structures provided in a game area | region. In FIG. 22, the main flow path of game balls in the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433 is illustrated by arrows, and a part of the game balls flowing down is illustrated for reference.

  As described above, a game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 because the player has played a right-handed game technique has not entered the upper prize winning device 434 or has passed through the branch passage 820. If the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 reaches the lower-rank prize-winning apparatus 433 and the lower-ranking prize-winning apparatus 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball (game ball PA in FIG. 22) does not enter the lower-ranked prize winning apparatus 433, The game area on the left side of the lower prize-winning device 433 passes through the upper side of the winning device 433.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the lower left when the lower prize-winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture. When the grand prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the lower major prize winning device 433 flows down the upper surface of the lower major prize winning device 433 in the lower left direction, and is on the left side of the lower major prize winning device 433. It is discharged into the game area.

  The upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 is configured such that the depth width thereof allows the game balls to flow down one by one, but cannot allow a plurality of game balls to flow in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine at the same time. Is done. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls flow down the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433, the plurality of game balls are aligned on the upper surface and flow down in the lower left direction along the upper surface in a row. To do.

  As described above, the lower right start winning device 832 and the general winning device 439B are provided in the game area on the left side of the lower major winning device 433. More specifically, of the lower right starting prize winning device 832 and the general winning prize device 439B, the lower right starting winning prize device 832 has a lower top prize winning device 433 in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine than the general winning prize device 439B. It is provided at a close position.

  A ball passage 861 for guiding a game ball to the lower right start winning device 832 is provided on the upstream side of the lower right starting winning device 832, and the game ball is guided to the general winning device 439 B on the upstream side of the general winning device 439 B. A spherical passage 862 is provided. Both the inlet 861A of the ball passage 861 and the inlet 862A of the ball passage 862 are provided at positions downstream of the flow path of the game ball constituted by the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433. Therefore, the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower grand prize winning device 433 can enter either the ball passage 861 or the ball passage 862 via the inlet 861A or the inlet 862A.

  More specifically, the entrance 861A is closer to the lower prize-winning device 433 in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine than the entrance 862A, and the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 are It is provided at a position where it can enter with a higher probability than the entrance 862A.

  When a game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower major prize winning device 433 enters the ball passage 861 through the entrance 861A, if the lower right starting prize winning device 832 is in an approach permitting posture, the game ball is given a lower right starting prize. Enter device 832. On the other hand, if the lower right starting prize winning device 832 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball that has entered the ball passage 861 does not enter the lower right starting prize winning device 832 and passes downstream in front of the lower right starting prize winning device 832. Flow down to the side. The game balls that have flowed down without entering the lower right start winning device 832 enter the discharge port 401A and are guided to the collection discharge passage.

  Further, the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 can enter the entrance 862A via the branch port 863, although the probability is low as compared to the entrance to the entrance 861A. The game that has entered the ball passage 862 through the entrance 862A flows down the ball passage 862 and enters the general winning device 439B.

  Further, the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 pass through the branch port 864 with a lower probability than the entrance to the entrance 861A or the entrance 862A, and in the left-right direction of the gaming machine front view. It moves from the entrance 862A further away from the lower prize-winning device 433. The game balls that have passed through the branch port 864 flow down the game area, reach the discharge port 401A, and are guided from the discharge port 401A to the collection / discharge passage.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower right passage portion 810C located on the most downstream side among the upper right passage portion 810A, the right middle passage portion 810B, and the lower right passage portion 810C constituting the right sphere passage 810 is: The exit formed between the nails 411E is arranged directly above the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434 in a range narrower than the width (length in the left-right direction) of the entrance. Therefore, when the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry-permitted state, the game balls that have entered the lower right passage portion 810C are placed in the lower right passage portion 810C on the upstream side of the upper prize winning device 434. Except for the case of entering 439C, all of them can enter the top prize winning device 434.

  On the other hand, since the right middle passage portion 810B connected to the upstream side of the lower right passage portion 810C has a branch port to the branch passage 820, all the game balls that have entered the upper right passage portion 810A are provided. Does not enter the lower right passage portion 810C, and a part thereof enters the lower right passage portion 810C via the branch passage 820, thereby basically losing the opportunity to enter the upper prize winning device 434.

  Here, in the right sphere passage 810, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810B are roughly configured as a thick passage portion including three downstream flow paths, while the right middle passage portion 810B is formed in the upper right passage portion. It is comprised so that it may have a passage part narrower than 810A and lower right passage part 810C. That is, the right sphere passage 810 is configured as a constricted passage in the right middle passage portion 810B.

  Since the right sphere passage 810 is configured in the above-described shape, the game ball that has entered the upper right passage portion 810A is scattered in the left-right direction so as to flow down one of the three flow paths, and then the right middle It flows down so that it may gather in the left-right direction in the channel | path part 810B. Thus, since the flow of the game ball changes in the right middle passage portion 810B, even if the game ball enters the branch passage 820 from the branch port in the right middle passage portion 810B, it is difficult for the player to recognize it. .

  In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C via the right middle passage portion 810B flows down again in the right and left direction in the lower right passage portion 810C. Therefore, the flow of the game ball changes again by entering the lower right passage portion 810C from the right middle passage portion 810B. Also in this point, the game ball enters the branch passage 820 from the branch port in the right middle passage portion 810B. Even so, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change.

  In addition, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C sandwiching the right middle passage portion 810B are broad passage portions that roughly include three flow paths, and the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion. 810C is configured to be longer in the vertical direction than the width in the horizontal direction. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to specify the flow path of the game ball in these passage portions 810A and 810C, and the player's line of sight is dispersed. Also in this respect, even if the game ball enters the branch passage 820 from the branch port in the right middle passage portion 810B, it is difficult for the player to recognize this.

  As a result, among the game balls that have entered the upper right passage portion 810A, a part of the game balls have entered the branch passage 820 and the opportunity to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is basically lost. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize, it is possible to give the player an illusion that all of the game balls that have entered the lower right passage portion 810C can enter the upper prize device 434 or the general prize device 439C. Therefore, it is possible to give an impression to the player as if many game balls have entered the upper prize winning device 434 sensuously in the special game state. Thereby, the interest of the game which launches a game ball aiming at the top prize-winning device 434 in the special game state can be improved.

  In addition, the upper prize winning device 434 is configured to allow the game ball to enter through an entrance having a width that is approximately five times the diameter of the game ball in the entry-permitted state, so that the game ball flowing down the lower right passage portion 810C is The player can enter the top prize winning device 434 from various positions in the width direction of the wide top prize winning device 434 while being scattered from side to side. In this respect as well, it is possible to give the player an impression that many game balls have entered the upper prize device 434 sensuously.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state, an improvement in the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the top prize winning device 434, and the prize ball (game value) acquired by the player It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the disadvantage that the game hall (hall) side receives due to excess.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the general winning device 439C is provided in the lower right passage portion 810C, so that the player has a game ball that has been launched aiming at the upper winning device 434. It is easy to pay attention to these winning devices 434 and 439C in order to care which of the winning device 434 or the general winning device 439C is entered. In particular, the general prize-winning device 439C is a prize-winning device having a lower value than the top-ranked prize-winning device 434. Attention is high. Since the player pays attention to the winning devices 434 and 439C, the player's line of sight is easily deviated from the branch opening to the branch passage 820. Also in this respect, the game ball is also branched in the right middle passage portion 810B. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not he has entered the game.

  Here, the branch port to the branch passage 820 is a right end side in a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction around a line segment having a maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game region formed in the game board 400. Is provided. In other words, the branch port to the branch passage 820 is arranged on the end side of the widest range in the left and right direction in the game area or a range corresponding to this, so that the player's line of sight is at the branch port to the branch passage 820. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to properly recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 from the branch port.

  Further, the branch opening to the branch passage 820 is provided on the right end side of the right middle passage portion 810B, while the general winning device 439C is provided at a position close to the left side in the lower right passage portion 810C. Therefore, the player pays attention to the general winning device 439C, so that the line of sight is easily separated from the branch opening to the branch passage 820, and it becomes difficult to monitor. Therefore, also in this point, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

  Further, the branch port to the branch passage 820 is on the right end side in the right middle passage portion 810B of the right ball passage 810 provided in the right game area, that is, on the side away from the decorative symbol display device 479 in the right middle passage portion 810B. Therefore, when the player pays attention to the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the special game state, the line of sight is easily separated from the branch opening to the branch passage 820 and it becomes difficult to monitor. Therefore, also in this point, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

  Further, since a nail row (a nail row including nails 411B, 411C, 411D) inclined downward toward the branch port to the branch passage 820 is formed, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B is Along a row of rows (an array that is inclined downward to the right), the branch is branched at a relatively fast natural flow and enters the branch passage 820 from the branch. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, on the upper left side of the nail row including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D, a passage wall 811 (one of the passage walls of the right sphere passage 810) that forms a downward slope to the right together with the nail row. The passage wall 811 also has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B to the branch port of the branch passage 820 with a relatively fast and natural flow.

  On the other hand, the nail row descending and tilting toward the branch passage to the branch passage 820 includes the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D constituting the entrance to the lower right passage portion 810C. The game ball flowing down 810B can enter the lower right passage portion 810C from the entrance. At this time, since the flow direction of the game ball entering the entrance of the lower right passage portion 810C intersects the flow direction of the game ball toward the branch port to the branch passage 820, the entrance of the lower right passage portion 810C. The flow of game balls entering the game is unnatural and relaxed compared to the flow of game balls toward the branch opening to the branch passage 820. Therefore, the flow of game balls entering the entrance of the lower right passage portion 810C tends to remain in the player's impression as compared to the flow of game balls toward the branch port to the branch passage 820. Therefore, also in this point, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

  Further, the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102 cannot visually recognize the back side from the front side, unlike the light-transmitting plates (front plate 222 and rear plate 223) disposed inside the opening 210A. Part. Therefore, when the game ball P completely enters the surface that forms the branch port to the branch passage 820, the branch passage is such that a part of the game ball P overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. Since most of 820 overlaps with the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction, the game ball that has entered the branch passage 820 from the right middle passage portion 810B enters the branch passage 820 at the same time or enters the branch passage 820. As soon as it enters, it enters the back side of the front decorative body 210, thereby deviating from the player's view. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

  In addition, in a general pachinko machine, the special game state is terminated when a specified number of game balls enter the upper prize device 434. Therefore, all of the game balls fired aiming during the special game state are large. When the player enters the winning device 434, the time required for the specified number of game balls to enter the upper prize device 434 is shortened, and the special gaming state is completed in a short time. When the special game state is completed in a short time, the special game state to be excited may become pale and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B enters the branch passage 820, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is basically the same. Since it is lost, it becomes difficult to end the special gaming state in a short time, and thereby it is possible to suppress the special gaming state from becoming pale and reducing the interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the entrance 861A of the ball passage 861 for guiding the game ball to the lower right start winning device 832 and the game ball to the general winning device 439B are provided in the left region of the lower large winning device 433. Is provided with an inlet 862A of a ball passage 862 for guiding. More specifically, the entrance 861A is closer to the lower prize-winning device 433 in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine than the entrance 862A, and the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 are entered. It is provided at a position where it can enter with higher probability than 862A.

  That is, among the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433, a relatively large number of game balls pass through the entrance 861A provided relatively close to the lower prize-winning device 433, and the ball passage 861. On the other hand, a relatively small number of game balls enter the ball passage 862 through an inlet 862A provided relatively far from the lower prize-winning device 433.

  According to this configuration, game balls discharged to the player through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 are mainly ball paths from the entrance 861A provided near the lower prize-winning device 433 from the entrance 862A. In the case where the user enters the entrance 861 but cannot enter the entrance 861A, an impression can be given as if entering the entrance 862A provided farther away from the lower prize-winning device 433 than the entrance 861A.

  As a result, when a game ball is launched aiming to enter the right ball passage 810, even if the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 cannot enter the upper prize device 434, the lower prize device 433 It is possible to make the player feel as if many of the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the player are guided to the lower right start winning device 832 or the general winning device 439B.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right ball passage 810. Further, the disappointment of the player when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize device 434 is also suppressed.

  In particular, the game balls that have reached the lower prize-winning device 433 flow down while being rectified one by one in a row on the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433, so that the players are sequentially discharged one by one. By looking at the game balls, it is as if each of these game balls has entered either the ball passage 861 or the ball passage 862, that is, almost all of the game balls that have reached the lower prize-winning device 433 are passed through the ball passage. The illusion of entering the ball 861 or the ball passage 862 is likely to occur. Accordingly, it is possible to more suitably improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the right ball passage 810, and the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434. In this case, the player's discouragement can be more suitably suppressed.

  In addition, the probability that the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower grand prize winning device 433 passes through the branch port 864 is lower than either the entrance probability to the entrance 861A or the entrance probability to the entrance 862A. It is possible to prevent all of the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower large winning device 433 from entering the lower right starting winning device 832 or the general winning device 439B. Thereby, since it can suppress that an excessive privilege (for example, prize ball) is given to a player, it can control that a game hall (hole) side suffers a disadvantage by giving an excessive privilege.

  As the winning devices that allow the game balls that have reached the lower major winning device 433 to enter, there are provided winning devices that give different privileges (that is, the lower right start winning device 832 and the general winning device 439B). Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 reaches the lower prize-winning device 433 without entering the upper prize-winning device 434, the behavior of the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower major prize-winning device 433 In this respect, the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the right ball passage 810 can be preferably improved.

  In particular, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the lower right start winning device 832 including the winning / losing lottery as a privilege reaches higher probability than the general winning device 439B not including the winning / failing lottery as a privilege. Therefore, the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower grand prize winning device 433 are likely to enter a winning device (that is, the lower right starting prize winning device 832) that can give a privilege of higher value. Therefore, also in this respect, the player's discouragement when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434 can be suitably suppressed, and the right ball passage 810 can be It is possible to improve the interest of games that aim to launch game balls.

  On the other hand, the lower right starting prize-winning device 832 can enter only when it is in the approach permitting posture, and when it is in the approach-prohibiting posture, the game ball passes downstream in front of the lower right starting winning device 832. And then discharged from the discharge port 401A. Therefore, not all of the game balls that have entered the entrance 861A enter the lower right start prize-winning device 832, and therefore it is possible to prevent the game hall (hall) from suffering disadvantages due to excessive provision of benefits. In addition, it is possible to suitably suppress a monotonous game when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the game area on the right side of the game board 400 has a flow-down area that can be struck according to the launch strength of the game ball (that is, the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252). The right downstream area 708 and the middle downstream area 709 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (see FIG. 16).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of flow-down areas that can be divided according to the launching intensity of the game ball are provided so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine. In the following description, the same components as those in the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  First, the structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 23A is a front view in which the upper right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment is partially enlarged. FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 400 taken along the line AA in FIG.

  FIG. 23 shows a schematic outline of main structures provided in the game area. Further, in FIG. 23B, a rear plate 223 disposed in front of the game board 400 so that the game board 400 can be visually recognized is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 23, for reference, a part of the game ball flowing down the game board 400 is illustrated, and a part of the flow path is illustrated by arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, a right upstream lower region 807 is connected to a guide passage 711 that guides a game ball fired from the launching device 330 to the game region on the right side of the game board 400. A through hole 871 through which a game ball can pass back and forth is formed in the lower right upper region 807 from the front side to the back side of the game board 400 (base 401). The through hole 871 is connected to the upper end side of the backward flow area 808 formed on the back side of the game board 400.

  The lower right upstream region 807 is connected to the forward downstream region 809 downstream from the through hole 871. Therefore, the through-hole 871 allows the game ball that has entered the right upstream lower region 807 from the guide passage 711 to be located on the back side of the game board 400 instead of the front flow area 809 that is connected to the right upstream lower area 807 on the front side of the game board 400. It functions as a branch port that branches into the backward flow area 808 provided on the side.

  A nail 411 that functions as a guide member for the through-hole 871 is provided directly below the through-hole 871 in the lower right upstream region 807, that is, below the through-hole 871 on the axis passing through the approximate center of the through-hole 871 in the vertical direction. 411F) is erected. Although details will be described later, when the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream region 807 properly contacts the nail 411F, the game ball rebounded by the nail 411F enters the through hole 871.

  A through hole 872 through which a game ball can pass back and forth with respect to the game board 400 (base 401) is formed in the upper left of the upper right start winning device 731. The through-hole 872 is connected to the lower end side of the backward flow area 808 formed on the back side of the game board 400 and functions as an outlet of the backward flow area 808.

  In addition, the through hole 872 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the front flow area 809 can come into contact with the game ball discharged from the rear flow area 808 via the through hole 872. Although details will be described later, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball that flows down the forward flow area 809 is brought into contact with the game ball discharged from the through-hole 872, so that the former game ball (that is, , A game ball that has flowed down the backward flow area 808) can enter the upper right start winning device 731.

  Directly below the through hole 872, that is, below the through hole 872 on the axis passing through the approximate center of the through hole 872 in the vertical direction, protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 400 (base 401), and passes through the through hole 872. A projecting member 873 that temporarily supports the game ball discharged from the lower side from the lower side is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, the backward flow area 808 is formed from the space formed between the back surface of the game board 400 (base 401) and the groove portion of the passage forming member 881 disposed on the back surface side. Composed. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the backward flow area 808 has a channel portion having the same shape as the forward flow area 809, and the flow path portion is in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine with respect to the forward flow area 809. It is provided so that it may overlap.

  Next, the flow-down mode of game balls in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. When the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream area 807 through the guide passage 711 comes into contact with the nail 411F, the game ball flows down through a flow path according to how the nail 411F comes into contact.

  For example, when a game ball that has entered the right upstream lower region 807 contacts the upper left side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F, the game ball nail is bounced to the left side by the nail 411F. It enters the forward flow area 809 through the left side of the nail 411F and flows down the forward flow area 809.

  Further, when the game ball that has entered the right upstream lower region 807 contacts the upper right side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F, the game ball nail is bounced to the right side by the nail 411F. It enters the forward flow area 809 through the right side of the nail 411F and flows down the forward flow area 809.

  On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream region 807 comes into contact with the nail 411F from almost right above the nail 411F, the game ball is repelled by the nail 411F toward the through hole 871 located immediately above the nail 411F. At this time, when the game ball enters the through hole 871, the game ball enters the rear flow region 808 from the through hole 871 and flows down the rear flow region 808. That is, the game ball that has entered the right upstream lower region 807 can enter the through hole 871 when it appropriately contacts the nail 411F.

  The contact position of the nail 411F with respect to the game ball can be adjusted by using, for example, a recoil prevention member 805 provided at the upper right end of the outer rail 402. Similar to the recoil prevention member 405 (see FIG. 14), the recoil prevention member 805 is a member formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber, and passes through the guide passage 711 as shown in FIG. A surface that can be contacted by a game ball (hereinafter, this surface is referred to as a “contactable surface”) is arranged so as to stand in the vertical direction.

  When a game ball (for example, game ball P3) that goes to the game area on the right side through the guide passage 711 contacts (collises) the contactable surface of the recoil prevention member 805, the game ball is moved by the recoil prevention member 805. A little bounces to the left. The game ball that has collided with the recoil prevention member 805 is bounced back to the left side as the collision is stronger, so that the contact position of the game ball with respect to the nail 411F can be changed according to the degree of collision with the recoil prevention member 805. .

  That is, as the degree of collision with the recoil prevention member 805 is weaker, the rebound of the game ball by the recoil prevention member 805 is weakened. For example, the degree of collision is the weakest, and the contact surface of the recoil prevention member 805 is almost the same. When flowing down along the trajectory along, the game ball can be brought into contact with the upper left side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F.

  The stronger the degree of collision with the recoil prevention member 805, the larger the game ball bounces back to the left. Therefore, as the degree of collision increases, the game ball is moved from almost directly above the nail 411F to the nail 411F. In addition, the game ball can be brought into contact with the upper right side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F.

  As described above, the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream region 807 flows down along the flow path according to the contact position of the game ball with respect to the nail 411F. Therefore, by adjusting the collision degree of the game ball with respect to the recoil prevention member 805, The flow path of the game ball can be adjusted. On the other hand, since the degree of collision of the game ball with respect to the recoil prevention member 805 can be adjusted according to the launch strength of the game ball, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 to move forward. It is possible to make the game ball flow down in a flow-down region intended by the player in the flow-down region 809 or the rear flow-down region 808.

  Further, the nail 411F is separated from the outer rail 402, which is a member that restricts the advancing direction of the game ball toward the upper side by the firing force, that is, the position where the game ball rebounded by the recoil prevention member 805 can first contact. Thus, by providing at a position where the game ball that has progressed downward can be contacted first, the probability of entering the through hole 871 according to the launch strength of the game ball (that is, the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252 by the player) Can be changed efficiently.

  Even if the game ball does not collide with the recoil prevention member 805, it can be changed according to the contact position of the game ball with the nail 411F. In that case, as the launching strength of the game ball is weaker, the game ball can be brought into contact with the upper right side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F, and as the launching strength of the game ball increases, it is almost directly above the nail 411F. The game ball can be brought into contact with the nail 411F. Therefore, even at this point, the player can cause the game ball to flow down in the flow area intended by the player in the forward flow area 809 or the backward flow area 808 by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252. Is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the game ball that has entered the backward flow area 808 from the through hole 871 is rectified by the projections 881A to 881D formed on the game board 400 (base 401) and the passage forming member 881. It flows down the back side of the game board 400 and is discharged from the through hole 872 to the upper surface 873A of the protruding member 873 to be discharged to the front side of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the protruding member 873 is configured such that the upper surface 873A is inclined downward toward the left in a front view of the gaming machine. Therefore, the game ball (for example, the game ball P7) discharged from the through hole 872 falls from the left side of the projecting member 873 according to the shape of the upper surface 873A in the front view of the game machine when it is not interfered with by another game ball. Then, it flows down through the left side of the upper right start winning device 731.

  On the other hand, the game balls that flow down the forward flow area 809 without entering the through hole 871 flow down on the front side of the game board 400 through a path passing through the left side of the upper right start winning device 731. A game ball flowing down the forward flow-down region 809 can contact a game ball (for example, a game ball P7) on the protruding member 873, such as a game ball P8. The game ball flowing down the forward flow area 809 comes into contact with the game ball on the protruding member 873, so that the latter game ball (that is, the game ball on the protruding member 873 discharged from the through hole 872) When falling from the right side, the game ball enters the upper right start winning device 731.

  The forward flow area 809 and the backward flow area 808 are respectively a forward flow area when a game ball continuously fired from the launching device 330 enters the backward flow area 808 and then enters the forward flow area 809. The game ball flowing down the area 809 is configured to have a length that can contact the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 via the backward flow area 808.

  Therefore, after the player has launched a game ball from the launching device 330 with a launch strength within a predetermined strength range in which the player can enter the through-hole 871, the game ball is continuously inserted into the predetermined strength range after the game ball. The game ball enters the upper right start prize winning device 731 by launching from the launching device 330 with a firing strength having a stronger firing strength and flowing down the forward flow area 809 without entering the through hole 871 (winning). It becomes possible to make it. In other words, the game ball can enter the upper right start winning device 731 when the player intentionally adjusts the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 as described above.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23B, the upper surface 873A of the protruding member 873 is configured in a curved shape that is slightly lower on the center side than the end in the front-rear direction in a side view. . Therefore, after the game ball (for example, the game ball P7) discharged from the through hole 872 is moved to the front side (that is, the side approaching the rear plate 223) along the upper surface 873A, the game ball is moved to the rear side again and back and forth. It can be made to move in a direction.

  Accordingly, it is possible to secure a relatively long time for the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 to stay on the protruding member 873 (the upper surface 873A), and accordingly, the game ball flowing down the forward flow area 809 correspondingly. The probability of contacting the upper game ball can be increased.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball that has entered the backward flow region 808 from the through hole 871 flows while being rectified by the protrusions 881A to 881D, so that the behavior of the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 is stably maintained. be able to. Thereby, the time for the game ball discharged from the through-hole 872 to stay on the protruding member 873 can be kept substantially uniform when the game ball is not interfered with by other game balls. It can be suppressed that the probability that the flowing game ball contacts the game ball on the protruding member 873 greatly varies each time.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the game ball that has entered the right upstream lower region 807 from the guide passage 711 flows down either the front downstream region 809 or the rear downstream region 808 that branches in the right upstream lower region 807. A through hole 871 formed in the lower right upstream region 807 functions as a branch port between the front flow down region 809 and the rear flow down region 808, and the probability of entering the through hole 871 depends on the launch strength of the game ball. Since the player can adjust the state of contact between the nail 411F and the nail 411F, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 so that the player himself / herself is the intended one of the front flow area 809 and the rear flow area 808. The game ball can flow down in the flowing down area.

  Two falling areas (that is, the front falling area 809 and the rear falling area 808) that the player can aim at each by adjusting the amount of rotation operation with respect to the firing handle 252 are one flowing area (the rear falling area 808). ) Is provided so as to overlap the other flowing area (front flowing area 809) in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine.

  By providing two branched flow areas so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine, both of the two branched areas are provided on the front side of the game board 400 (base 401) (for example, FIG. 16). Compared with the right flow down area 708 and the middle flow down area 709) shown in FIG. 3, the area occupied by the flow down area on the front side of the game board 400 can be suppressed, and accordingly, a display unit such as a decorative symbol display device 479 In addition, it is possible to secure a larger area for arranging a movable member for production. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably utilize a limited area in the game board 400.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, the game ball is released from the launch device 330 with a launch strength within a predetermined strength range that can enter the through hole 871. After launching, the subsequent game ball is continuously fired from the game ball at a launch strength that is stronger than the predetermined strength range and the game ball flows down the forward flow area 809 without entering the through hole 871. It is necessary to launch from the launcher 330.

  Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the upper right start winning device 731, it is necessary for the player to intentionally adjust the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252, so that the game ball is fired from the launch device 330. The monotony of the game can be reduced. In addition, in order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, the player's skill is also required to some extent. Therefore, in this respect as well, the monotony of the game performed by firing the game ball from the launch device 330 is reduced. Can be reduced.

  In addition, this invention is not restricted to the said embodiment, For example, you may deform | transform and implement as described below. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

  (1) In the first embodiment, the launching device reaches the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 through the middle downstream area 409 rather than through the right downstream area 408. Although it is configured to delay by the same time as the shortest firing interval in 330, it is not always necessary to delay by the same time as the shortest firing interval. For example, it is good also as a structure delayed in the range of 3 / 4-5 / 4 of the shortest discharge interval, or a structure delayed in the range of 1 / 2-3 / 2 of the shortest discharge interval. Even in these configurations, as compared to the case where both the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball are made to reach the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433 through the right flow down area 408 or the middle flow down area 409, Either the game ball flowing down through the middle downstream area 409 or the game ball flowing down through the right downstream area 408 is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 or the lower prize winning switch 443, so that the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device is detected. Before 433 changes to the entry prohibited state, there is a high possibility that both of these game balls can enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. As the delay time approaches the shortest launch interval, both the game ball that has flowed down through the middle flow area 409 and the game ball that has flowed down through the right flow area 408 are allowed to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. The probability of being able to be increased. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which delays only predetermined time longer than 3/2 of the shortest firing interval. In this case, the player can know the timing of launching the next game ball so as to flow down the right flow area 408, for example, by marking a predetermined part of the guide passage 424 and marking the mark. When a game ball hits a given part, a configuration in which the next game ball is launched so as to flow down the right flow area 408 or a timing at which the next game ball is launched is notified by the decorative symbol display device 479. Is preferred.

  (2) In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the operation necessary to enjoy the privilege is indirectly notified by the remaining number of entry waits in the decorative symbol display device 479, and the specific timing is determined by the player. Although the configuration is determined, it is not necessary to have such a configuration. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, five balls) of game balls enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower major prize winning device 433, a notification is made to change the launch strength so that the game balls flow down through the middle downstream area 409. In addition, immediately after that, a specific operation timing may be notified by notifying that the launching strength is returned to the maximum strength so that the game ball flows down through the right-falling region 408. When a specific timing is notified, all of the game balls (for example, two balls) that have already been launched when a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 are upper. Since it is assumed that the player has entered the grand prize winning device 434 or the lower grand prize winning device 433, a game ball that flows down through the middle downstream area through the right downstream area 408 or the middle downstream area 409 is the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower grand prize winning. It is particularly preferable to apply the configuration to the device 433 surely or with a very high probability (95% or more).

  (3) In the first embodiment, when reaching the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433, when passing through the middle downstream area 409, the configuration is delayed than when passing through the right downstream area 408. However, it is not always necessary to delay the case where the middle flow down region 409 is passed. For example, the configuration may be faster when passing through the middle downstream region 409 than when passing through the right downstream region 408. However, in the case of this configuration, after a game ball is launched so as to flow down through the right flow down region 408, the next game ball needs to be driven out through the middle flow down region 409. In addition, as for the time to advance, it is preferable to advance in the range of 1/2 to 3/2 of the shortest firing interval, as in the case of delaying above, and 3/4 to 5/4 of the shortest firing interval. It is more preferred to advance by range, and most preferably to advance by the same time as the shortest firing interval.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the number of game balls smaller by “1” than the prescribed number is allowed to flow down through the right flow area 408 until entering the upper large winning device 434 or the lower large winning device 433. The game ball is launched, and after that, the game ball is once launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409, and then the game ball is launched again through the right downstream region 408. Further, it is not necessary to have a configuration in which the adjustment of the launch in three stages is performed. For example, in the case of delaying the arrival at the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 when passing through the middle-stream lower area 409, the number of game balls smaller by the number “1” than the prescribed number is the upper prize winning. Until the player enters the device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433, a game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409, and further, the next game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409. A configuration may be adopted in which game balls are launched so as to flow down through the region 408. Also, for example, when the player reaches the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the midstream lower area 409, the number of game balls that are smaller by “1” than the prescribed number is increased. The game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 until it enters the big prize winning device 434 or the lower grand prize winning device 433, and then the game ball is once shot out so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408. A configuration may be adopted in which the next game ball is launched so as to flow down through the flow down region 409. Also, until a number of game balls smaller by “1” than the prescribed number enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower major prize winning device 433, the game balls are launched so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408, and further down to the right flow A configuration may be adopted in which after a game ball is launched so as to flow down through the region 408, the game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle flow region 409.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the number of game balls that enter the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 is approximately two at the same time. However, it is not always necessary to have two balls. . For example, in addition to the right downstream region 408 and the middle downstream region 409, at least one new downstream region different from the left downstream region 407 is formed, and each of the right downstream region 408, the middle downstream region 409, and the new downstream region 409 is formed. It is good also as a structure which accelerates | stimulates that the 3 or more flowed down game balls approach into the upper prize-winning apparatus 434 and the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 substantially simultaneously.

  (6) In the first embodiment, a game ball that has been launched so as to flow down through the middle downstream region 409 and a game ball that has been launched so as to flow down through the right downstream region 408 are substantially larger at the same time. Although it is configured to increase the possibility of entering the winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433, there is a possibility that the game balls that have flowed through different flow areas may enter the upper winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 almost simultaneously. It is not necessary to have a configuration that increases. For example, it may be configured to increase the possibility that two game balls launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 at substantially the same time.

  Here, this configuration will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a partially enlarged front view of a modified example of the game board. In the game board 400 shown in FIG. 15, a path switching mechanism 425 is provided between the upper side-by-side passage part 424 </ b> C and the lower side-by-side passage part 424 </ b> D that are arranged vertically in the guide passage 424. The path switching mechanism 425 is a delay guide so as to form a path that short-circuits the delay guide path plate 425A that forms the bottom surface of the upper side-by-side path part 424C, and the upper side-by-side path part 424C and the lower side-by-side path part 424D. A rotation control mechanism (not shown) that rotates the passage plate 425A by approximately 90 degrees is provided. On the upper surface of the delay guide passage plate 425A, there is formed a guide groove (not shown) that bends in the front-rear direction so that the game balls that have flowed down the guide passage 424 flow down over a period of about 1 second. Yes. In addition, when two game balls flow down on the delay guide passage plate 425A, the rotation control mechanism unit rotates the delay guide passage plate 425A by the weight of the two game balls. The game balls are released to the lower side-by-side passage portion 424D. When such a path switching mechanism 425 is provided, if two game balls are launched at the shortest firing interval so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409, the time for the game balls to pass over the delay guide path plate 425A. Is longer than the shortest firing interval, the subsequent game ball enters the delay guide passage plate 425A before the previous game ball finishes passing over the delay guide passage plate 425A. As a result, the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball are discharged to the lower side-by-side passage portion 424D, and the flow of the guide passage 424 continues at least at an interval equal to or less than the length of the delay guide passage plate 425A. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that these two game balls enter the upper prize device 434 or the lower prize device 433 almost simultaneously.

  (7) In the first embodiment, in the special game state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained as a privilege is increased by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of a predetermined launch handle by the player (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball). However, the benefit may not necessarily be an increase in the number of prize balls. For example, even if game balls exceeding a prescribed number enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, only the prescribed number of game balls when the prescribed number of game balls enter them is given, and the prescribed number is given as a privilege. It may be configured to increase the chance that a special effect can be appreciated in the ending effect according to the number of times that the exceeding game balls have entered the upper prize device 434 or the lower prize device 433. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which can enjoy | combine and enjoy benefits, such as the privilege of an increase in the number of prize balls, and the increase in the appreciation opportunity of a special production.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the discharge port 424B of the guide passage 424 is formed at the upper left of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. The configuration may not be formed in the vicinity of the winning device 433. For example, it is possible to form a guide passage that discharges to the upper left of the starting device 436 related to the normal design, and to facilitate the entry of two game balls into the upper large winning device 434 and the lower large winning device 433 substantially simultaneously. . Further, the game ball flowing down through the middle downstream region 409 is released so as to be able to interfere (collision) with the game ball flowing down through the right downstream region 408, and the game ball flowing down through the right downstream region 408 is caused by the interference. It is good also as a structure which can accelerate | stimulate entering into the starter 436. FIG.

  When the flow path of the game ball is configured to be small in the right flow down area 408, or when the repulsion mode when contacting the obstacle member is set to be constant, the game ball continuously fired Although the flow-down time to flow down to reach the top prize winning device 434 and the like is constant so as to maintain a constant interval, the interference between the game balls is reduced, so the start-up port of the start-up device 436 is reduced in the flow of a single game ball. If the game ball is set so that little or no game balls enter the winning opening, the player may be unable to deal with and may be dissatisfied with the gaming machine. On the other hand, as described above, when the game ball that has flowed down through the middle downstream area 409 is discharged upstream from the start port and the winning port of the starter 436, the interference of the game ball is controlled by the player. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a privilege such as increasing the number of unit games or increasing the number of prize balls by changing the probability of entering the start opening or winning opening.

  (9) In the second embodiment, the unit game according to the first special symbol or the unit game according to the second special symbol is brought into an advantageous fluctuation state when the special game state by winning the big hit lottery ends. Although the game state is shifted, the unit game according to the first special symbol may be shifted to the advantageous fluctuation state after the special game state is ended by winning the big hit lottery.

  In such a configuration, when a long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs due to the game ball entering the upper right start winning device 731 during the special gaming state, this occurred based on the entry of the game ball into the upper right start winning device 731. A period in which the variation display of the unit game related to the first special symbol (that is, the unit game last stored and held at the timing when the long variation occurrence condition occurs) is longer than the variation time predetermined for the variation display. And it is good also as a structure performed with the fluctuation | variation time of the specific period (for example, 5 minutes) which enables the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100.

  Thereby, the fixed stop timing (that is, the display timing of the stop symbol) in the variable display of the unit game related to the first special symbol can be delayed from the initial timing, and as a result, the big hit lottery of the unit game is won. If so, the occurrence timing of the special gaming state can be delayed. Therefore, since the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can also be delayed, even in such a configuration, it is possible to leave the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, the probability of occurrence of a relatively large jackpot). Become.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which limits the start prize which operates the lower large prize apparatus 433 to the start prize which concerns on a 2nd special symbol in an advantageous fluctuation state. Thus, even when there is an upper limit on the number of unit games of the second special symbol that can be executed in the advantageous variation state, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, the privilege in the advantageous variation state is abandoned. Without it, it is possible to leave the pachinko machine 100.

  (10) In the second embodiment, the upper right start winning device 731 is provided on the right side of the game board 400 in place of the combination actuating device 435. The actuating device 435 may be provided, and when the game ball passes the combination actuating device 435, the lower prize-winning device 433 may be activated, or the game ball causes the combination actuating device 435 to operate for a certain period of time. If the lower prize-winning device 433 starts to operate when it does not pass, and the game ball passes through the combination actuating device 435, the lower major prize-winning device 433 starts at the timing when a certain time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed after the passage. The winning device 433 may start operating, and when a plurality of game balls are passed, the passage of a few minutes (for example, 5 minutes when five game balls are passed) passes. Later below Winning device 433 may be as to start the operation. Alternatively, instead of the upper right start winning device 731, it is an operating device different from the combination actuating device 435, and a game ball that has entered from the upstream side like the associated actuating device 435 is placed on the back side of the game board 400. A gate-like operation device that flows down on the game board 400 without being guided may be provided, and the long fluctuation occurrence condition may be satisfied when the game ball passes through the operation device. In this case, the operating device functions as a device that delays the fixed stop timing in the unit game variation display from the initial timing or delays the occurrence timing of the special gaming state, unlike the combination operating device 435. .

  (11) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the unit game to be executed next time is a period longer than the fluctuation time predetermined for the fluctuation display. In this case, it is configured to be executed with a fluctuation period of a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) that allows the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100. The unit game for which the variable display is performed is a unit game to be executed next time if at least one unit game among all the unit games held and stored at the timing when the long variation occurrence condition occurs is targeted. It does not necessarily have to be. For example, among all the unit games that are reserved and stored at the timing when the long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs, the variation time of the variable display of the last stored unit game may be set as the specific period. In addition, when the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, the variation display variation time may be set as the specific period for a plurality of unit games among the unit games held and stored at the timing when the long variation occurrence condition occurs.

  (12) In the second embodiment, when the game ball is allowed to enter the upper right start winning device 731 during the special game state, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, and thereby the long fluctuation occurrence condition is generated. In the unit game stored and stored in the above, the variation time of the variable display is set as the specific period for one unit game, but after the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, the game ball that has entered the upper right start winning device 731 Depending on the number of times, the number of game units having a variable time as a specific period may be increased.

  (13) In the second embodiment, the number of times that the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved is one, and the number of times that the unit game right related to the second special symbol is reserved is four times. In such a case, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied. However, a predetermined notification may be made when the number of unit game rights related to the second special symbol has reached four. The player can recognize from the notification that the reserved number of rights of the unit game related to the second special symbol has reached four times.

  When the advantageous fluctuation state ends and the game state returns to the normal game state, the player can start from the right-handed game technique aiming at the right game area on the game board 400, and the upper middle start prize device 431A or the lower middle start prize. The game is played by switching to the left-handed game technique aiming at the device 431B. When the game ball is fired by the right-handed game technique, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol generated based on the game ball entering the right start winning device 432 is easily held.

  Therefore, there are cases where the number of unit gaming rights related to the second special symbol has reached 4 times at the timing when the gaming state has returned to the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle start winning device 431B, there is no reason to lengthen the unit game variation display, the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, and the unit game variation The display is executed for a specific period.

  On the other hand, when the reserved number of rights of the unit game related to the second special symbol reaches four times, the player can grasp the fact by performing a predetermined notification, It is possible to switch to the left-handed gaming method after waiting for the unit game related to the second special symbol stored on hold to be digested (processed) so that the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it can be suitably avoided that the player wastes time due to unnecessary delay.

  The main control board 920 outputs a corresponding signal to the sub-control board 940 when the number of reserved times of the unit game right related to the second special symbol reaches 4, and the sub-control board 940 receives the received signal. Based on the above, a predetermined notification is executed using the decorative symbol display device 479, the acoustic devices 281 and 282, and the like. As the predetermined notification, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays a content indicating that the number of times that the right of the unit game right related to the second special symbol has been reached has reached four times, a content prompting the player to stop firing the game ball, etc. It may be a structure that can be reported by voice or the like.

  (14) In the second embodiment, the case where the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied during the special gaming state is exemplified, but the long variation occurrence condition may be configured to be satisfied even in the normal gaming state.

  (15) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 is initialized (reset), or the pachinko machine 100 An image that can reset the player's feelings, such as a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the player has entered a standby state, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Instead of the display) or in addition to these screen displays, the player's feeling may be reset by controlling the sound.

  For example, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is met, first the sound is muted (silenced), then the fluctuation display in the unit game is started internally, and characters such as “Reset” are displayed on the lighted background After a predetermined time (for example, the time that the remaining fluctuation time is about 30 seconds), the original fluctuation display including sound is restored, and the player leaves the fluctuation display from the pachinko machine 100. It is good also as a structure performed over a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) which makes it possible to take a break. By making silence during the “reset” display period, the player can easily receive the illusion that the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized. Instead of changing the volume, or in addition to changing the volume, a configuration may be used in which the content of the audio is changed.

  In addition, after the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, after the unit game variation display including the display of “in reset” as described above is performed at the initial variation time and the unit game is confirmed and stopped. , Execute a pseudo-variable display starting from a predetermined symbol (for example, 1, 2, 3) for a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) that allows the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100 It is good also as a structure. In this way, the pachinko machine 100 is initialized by newly performing pseudo-variable display from a predetermined symbol (for example, 1, 2, 3), and it seems as if some kind of change has occurred internally. An illusion can be easily felt by the player.

  (16) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 100 is initialized as an image that can reset the player's feelings by operating the power switch 909 or the initialization switch 907. The initial screen that is actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a result of being reset (reset) is illustrated. However, when the pachinko machine 100 is initialized (reset), the operation of the accessory to be initialized is performed. In addition to the display of the initial screen, the configuration may be performed. This makes it easier for the player to receive the illusion that the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized.

  (17) In the second embodiment, the player intentionally adjusts the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 and causes the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, thereby satisfying the long fluctuation occurrence condition. Thus, an image that can reset the player's feeling is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the image can be operated at a position (for example, the front side of the pachinko machine 100) that can be operated by the player playing the pachinko machine 100. Further, a dedicated operation unit (for example, a button or a lever) for displaying an image that can reset the player's feeling may be provided.

  In this configuration, the long variation occurrence condition may be satisfied regardless of the operation on the dedicated operation unit. In addition, by providing a dedicated operation unit, images that can reset the player's feelings according to the player's needs, regardless of the gaming state such as the normal gaming state as well as the special gaming state Can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  (18) In the second embodiment, when the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, in the next unit game including the variation display of the specific period, an image capable of resetting the player's feeling is displayed. It is good also as a structure which displays the image which can reset a player's feelings after completion | finish of the next unit game.

  (19) In the second embodiment, a game ball is made to flow to the upper right start winning device 731 by causing the game ball to flow down to the right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709 and making the two game balls contact each other. However, the configuration capable of performing a launch operation in which two game balls come into contact with each other is not limited to the configuration of the right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709. For example, It is good also as having the structure of the right flow down area | region 408 and the middle flow down area | region 409 in the said 1st Embodiment. Further, instead of the configuration of the right downstream region 408 and the middle downstream region 409 in the first embodiment, the configuration of the right downstream region 708 and the middle downstream region 709 in the second embodiment may be employed.

  (20) In the second embodiment described above, the number of times of the unit game rights related to the first special symbol is 1 and the number of times of the unit game rights related to the second special symbol is 4 times. By setting the case as a long fluctuation occurrence condition, it is possible for a player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the privilege in an advantageous fluctuation state (that is, a relatively high probability of jackpot occurrence). However, from the viewpoint that the player can easily leave the seat safely, regardless of the reserved number of unit games related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the player A configuration may be adopted in which a long variation occurrence condition is set when a game ball is made to enter a specific entrance or a winning entrance such as the upper right start winning device 731. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily generate a situation where the player can safely leave the seat.

  In addition, a dedicated operation unit (for example, a button or a lever) for generating a long fluctuation occurrence condition is provided at a position (for example, the front side of the pachinko machine 100) that can be operated by a player who plays with the pachinko machine 100. It is good also as a structure. In this configuration, the long variation occurrence condition may be satisfied regardless of the operation on the dedicated operation unit. Further, by providing the dedicated operation unit, it is possible to generate a situation in which the player can safely leave the seat as needed by operating the dedicated operation unit as necessary.

  In addition, a long fluctuation occurrence condition may be set when a situation in which a predetermined number or more of prize balls (game values) can be paid out from the payout device 540 in a short period of time. Players are more likely to feel euphoria due to a situation where a predetermined number of prize balls or more can be paid out in a short period of time. By giving an opportunity to leave the seat temporarily while the change is displayed, it becomes possible to calm down the player who has become enthusiastic and enthusiastic.

  Even in such a case, by providing a configuration in which the away-seatable information J is displayed when the fluctuation display for a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition is performed, the player is given a sense of security with respect to the absence of the person. Since it can be urged, it is preferable in terms of giving an opportunity to cool the player.

  As an example of “a situation in which a predetermined number or more of prize balls (game value) can be paid out from the payout device 540 in a short period of time”, for example, “a plurality of predetermined times (for example, 10 minutes) (for example, “When 3 times) special gaming state occurs” is exemplified.

  When the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied when "a plurality of special game states occur in a plurality of times in a short period of time", the special game state is continuously generated following the special game state that has been continuously generated. The fluctuation time of the case (big hit fluctuation) is the specific period determined based on the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation (when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied), and the fluctuation display (big hit) of the specific period (Variation) may be performed.

  Alternatively, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied when “a plurality of predetermined special gaming states occur in a short period of time”, the predetermined number of times (one time or once) executed after the consecutive special gaming states are generated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variation display time for a plurality of times is a specific period determined based on the variation display variation time when the long variation occurrence condition is not satisfied, and the variation display is performed for the specific period. In this case, the variation display that is set as the specific period is not limited to the loss variation, and may include a big hit variation.

  Further, “a situation where a predetermined number or more of winning balls (game value) can be paid out from the payout device 540 in a short period of time” is, for example, “a predetermined number or more (for example, approximately 2000 or more) games per time”. After the occurrence of a special game state in which value can be paid out (so-called lots of balls), a case of winning a big hit lottery of a unit game related to a special symbol within a short period of time '' is exemplified. Instead of the condition when the above-mentioned special gaming state is generated a predetermined number of times, or in addition to the condition, a long fluctuation generating condition may be used. Here, the “special gaming state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out at one time” means, for example, a long-term (for example, 10 rounds) special gaming state in which a large number of consecutive rounds can be played. It is.

  In addition, as a “short period” after the occurrence of “a special gaming state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out at one time (so-called many balls are played)”, for example, a variable display is a predetermined number of times ( For example, a period such as a period until 10 times) or a period until a lose reach is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) is exemplified.

  And long fluctuation occurrence condition in “when a special game state in which a predetermined number or more of game value can be paid out at one time has occurred, and then a big game lottery of a unit game related to a special symbol is won within a short period of time” Is established, the fluctuation time corresponding to the winning jackpot lottery (the jackpot fluctuation) will be the specific period determined based on the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied, It is good also as a structure which performs a fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation).

  In addition, if a predetermined number or more (for example, approximately 5000 or more) award balls can be paid out in a short period (for example, 10 minutes), the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied regardless of the occurrence of the special gaming state. It is good also as composition to do.

  (21) In the second embodiment described above, the separable information J is displayed when the variation display for a specific period based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition is performed. The information is not limited to visually recognizable information such as a character string displayed on the symbol display device 479, and may be configured to be reported by voice using the acoustic devices 281 and 282.

  (22) In the third embodiment, the right sphere passage 810 is configured as a constricted passage in the right middle passage portion 810B. However, the right middle passage portion 810B includes the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C. Similarly, the configuration may be a thick passage portion including a plurality of downflow paths (for example, three or more downflow paths) arranged in the left-right direction. In such a modified example, as in the third embodiment, although the effect due to the change of the flow of the game balls flowing down the respective passage portions 810A, 810B, and 810C is small, the player uses the right middle passage portion 810B. Since it is difficult to specify the flow path of the game ball in the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C between which the player's line of sight is dispersed, whether the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize whether or not.

  (23) In the third embodiment, the passage portion is broadly configured as a passage portion including three downflow paths. However, the number of downflow paths arranged in the left-right direction is a passage including a plurality of downflow paths arranged in the left-right direction. May be two or four or more.

  (24) Although the right sphere passage 810 is provided in the right game area in the third embodiment, a sphere passage having the same shape as the right sphere passage 810 may be provided in the left game area. In such a case, a branch passage similar to the branch passage 820 may be provided on the left end side of the ball passage.

  (25) In the third embodiment, the general winning device 439C is provided in the lower right passage portion 810C. However, the general winning device 439C may not be provided in the lower right passage portion 810C. In other words, when the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry-permitted state, all of the game balls that have entered the lower right passage portion 810C can enter the upper prize winning device 434.

  (26) In the third embodiment, the upper prize winning device 434 is configured such that the game ball can enter through the entrance having a width approximately five times the diameter of the game ball in the entry permitted state. The lateral width of the entrance of the device 434 is not limited to the above example, and is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment as long as it is at least approximately twice or more, preferably approximately three times or more the game ball. It is possible to produce an effect.

  (27) In the third embodiment, the boundary between the right middle passage portion 810B and the lower right passage portion 810C is a nail row (nail 411B, 411C, 411D) inclined downward toward the branch opening to the branch passage 820. However, the entrance to the lower right passage portion 810C may be provided downstream from the nail row that is inclined downward toward the branch port to the branch passage 820. . That is, the nail row, the right middle passage portion 810B, and the lower right passage portion 810C may have different boundaries.

  (28) In the third embodiment, the game ball that has entered the branch passage 820 from the branch port formed in the right middle passage portion 810B is discharged into the game area through the branch passage 820. The game ball that has entered the branch port formed in the right middle passage portion 810B may be guided to the recovery / discharge passage through a predetermined passage.

  (29) In the third embodiment, the case where most of the branch passage 820 overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction except for the vicinity of the branch opening to the branch passage 820 is illustrated. All the branch passages 820 including the branch port may be configured to overlap the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction.

  (30) In the third embodiment, the most part of the branch passage 820 overlaps with the front decoration body 210 in the front-rear direction, but the front decoration body overlaps with the branch passage 820 in the front-rear direction. It is not limited to a portion where the back side cannot be visually recognized from the front side as in 210, but it is thin even though it is difficult to see the back side from the front side, such as a dark transparent plate (for example, black). The part which can be visually recognized may be sufficient.

  (31) In the third embodiment, a part of the front decorative body 210 that overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the vicinity of the branch opening to the branch passage 820 is configured by the right edge portion 211E (see FIG. 5) as a light emitting portion. However, the front decorative body 210 may have a non-light emitting portion that does not emit light in the vicinity of the branch opening to the branch passage 820, so that the player can access the branch passage 820. This is preferable because it is easy to prevent the branch port from paying attention.

  (32) In the third embodiment, the outer edge of the opening 210A of the front decorative body 210 that overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the vicinity of the branch opening to the branch passage 820 is configured linearly, and the branch opening to the branch passage 820 is formed. In the above description, the right edge 211E (see FIG. 5) as a part of the front decorative body 210 that overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the vicinity of the door is configured with substantially the same left and right widths. It is preferable that the portion overlapping the vicinity of is a portion formed to have a narrower left and right width than at least one of the upper and lower sides with respect to the portion. The narrow left and right width portion of the right edge portion 211E of the front decorative body 210 is less likely to be provided with a passage on the rear side, and is a portion corresponding to a position greatly displaced in the left and right direction from the center in the gaming machine. It is preferable that the player can hardly pay attention to the branch port of the branch passage 820 provided in the part, thereby making it easier for the player not to pay attention to the branch port to the branch passage 820.

  (33) In the third embodiment, the upper surface of the lower grand prize-winning device 433 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward to the lower left, and guides the game ball to the lower-right starting prize-winning device 832; The ball path 862 for guiding the game ball to the general prize winning device 439B is provided on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433. However, the upper face of the lower prize winning device 433 is an inclined surface facing right lower, and the ball path 861 , 862 and the like may be arranged on the right side of the lower prize-winning device 433.

  (34) In the third embodiment, the two ball passages 861 and 862 are provided as the ball passages through which the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower grand prize winning device 433 can enter. If it is a spherical passage, it is good also as a structure which provides three or more spherical passages. In FIG. 22, the ball passages 861 and 862 are provided adjacent to each other, but the ball passage 861 and the ball passage 862 may be separated from each other. In such a case, it is preferable that the game ball cannot pass between the ball passage 861 and the ball passage 862, and the entrances 861A and 861B of the ball passage 861 and the ball passage 862 are between the entrance portions. It is preferable that they are provided so close that the entrances of other passages through which they can pass are not formed.

  (35) In the third embodiment, a game ball that has entered the ball passage 861 on the side close to the lower prize-winning device 433 is guided to the lower right starting prize-winning device 832 and is separated from the lower prize-winning device 433. The game ball that has entered 862 is guided to the general winning device 439B. However, the game ball that has entered the ball passage 861 is guided to the general winning device 439B, and the game ball that has entered the ball passage 862 has a lower right start winning prize. The structure guided to the apparatus 832 may be used. In other words, the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize-winning device 433 has a privilege (for example, lower value) than a winning device that can give a higher value privilege (for example, a privilege including a lottery determination). , A prize that does not include the winning / failing lottery) may be achieved with high probability.

  (36) In the third embodiment, all the game balls that have entered the ball passages 861 and 862 are guided to a winning device that can give a predetermined privilege, but one of the ball passages 861 and 862 The game ball may be guided to a simple discharge port such as an out port.

  (37) In the third embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 is configured to enter the discharge port 401A. However, the game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 enters a winning device that can grant a privilege. Or the structure which can enter may be sufficient. Note that the winning device that allows the game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 to enter is a winning device that is given a privilege of lower value than the winning device that allows the game ball that has entered the ball passages 861 and 862 to enter. Is preferred.

  (38) In the third embodiment, the game ball passing through the right ball passage 810 can enter the upper prize device 434 or the general prize device 439C as shown in FIG. 21, for example. The game ball passing through the right ball passage 810 may enter a discharge port such as an out port, and a winning device or a discharge port through which the game ball passing through the right ball passage 810 can enter is provided. The configuration may not be.

  (39) In the fourth embodiment, the rear flow region 808 has a flow channel portion having the same shape as the front flow region 809, and the flow channel portion is in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine with respect to the front flow region 809. Although the structure is provided so as to overlap, the rear flow area 808 and the front flow area 809 may each have a flow path portion having an independent shape when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Further, the flow path portion of the backward flow area 808 does not need to completely overlap the flow path portion of the front flow area 809 in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine, and may be configured to partially overlap. In addition, a configuration may be employed in which the flow path portion of the backward flow region 808 does not overlap the flow channel portion of the forward flow region 809 in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  Here, it is preferable that the rear flow area 808 has a flow path portion that does not overlap with the front flow area 809 in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine. A portion where the game ball passing through the flow-down region 808 is not hidden can be provided, and the game ball flowing down the rear flow-down region 808 can be easily seen.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, on the downstream side of the backward flow region 808, the game ball that is launched after the game ball flowing down the backward flow region 808 flows down the forward flow region 809. Although the structure which contacts is demonstrated, it is good also as a structure which has a means which makes it easy for a player to recognize the game ball which passes the preceding backflow area | region 808. FIG. For example, a switch for detecting the entry of a game ball at the entrance of the backward flow area 808 and a light emitting means such as an LED for emitting light in the backward flow area 808 are provided, and when the game ball enters the backward flow area 808, the backward flow area 808 may be irradiated with light to make it easier to visually recognize the entry of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the passage located on the back side, and to make it easier for the player to switch the firing operation.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the backward flow area 808 is configured so that the game ball flows down at a speed different from that of the forward flow area 809, but the game ball to the flow area located on the back side as viewed from the player is displayed. From the viewpoint of facilitating visual recognition of the approach, it is preferable that the flow-down area located on the back side has a configuration in which the flow of the game ball is slower than the flow-down area located on the near side. For example, the flow area located on the back side has a structure having a large number of flow path portions meandering in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction compared to the flow area located on the near side, or instead of this, In addition, it is preferable to have a configuration having a large number of delay portions or stop portions with a gentle slope so that the flow of the game ball can be delayed or stopped. As a result, the situation where the game ball flowing down the backward flow region 808 is blocked by the game ball flowing down the forward flow region 809 and is difficult to visually recognize can be temporarily reduced, and the game ball flows down the backward flow region 808. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the game ball.

  (40) In the fourth embodiment, the game board 400 is provided with one flow-down area (front flow-down area 809 and rear flow-down area 808) on the front side and the back side, but the back side of the game board 400 There may be two or more flow-down regions provided in.

  (41) In the fourth embodiment, a game ball that flows down by its own weight, such as a game ball bounced back by colliding with the recoil prevention member 805, flows forward 809, a nail 711F, a through hole 871, and a rear flow down region. It was set as the structure which passes 808. FIG. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which the game ball which flies with the launching force by having been launched from the launching device 300 passes through the front flow area 809, the nail 711F, the through hole 871, and the rear flow area 808.

  (42) You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the big hit expectation value is increased until the big hit state is generated a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times) including the big hit. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special gaming state on the condition that a ball wins a predetermined area after a big hit symbol is displayed. Moreover, you may implement in the enclosed pachinko machine with which a ball | bowl circulates. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a game machine such as a parrot of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
<Feature 10>
A launching means for launching game media with variable strength, a variable winning opening that allows entry of game media based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and prohibits entry based on entry of a predetermined number of game media; A first flow-down area in which a game medium launched from the launching means in a predetermined first intensity range flows down, and a predetermined second that is stronger than the strength in the first intensity range from the launching means and includes a maximum intensity. A gaming machine including a second flow down area in which a game medium launched in a strength range can flow down to the variable prize opening;
A game medium launched from the launching means in a strength range between the first strength range and the second strength range can flow down to the variable winning opening through a path different from the second flow-down region. Including three downflow areas,
In the state where the variable winning opening is allowed to enter, at least one game medium is caused to flow down through the second flow-down area by switching the strength of the game medium emitted from the launching means, and at least one game through the third flow-down area. A gaming machine comprising bonus granting means capable of granting bonuses regarding entry of gaming media into the variable prize opening by flowing down the media.

  In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a variable winning device that enters an entry-permitted state when a predetermined condition is satisfied and returns to an entry prohibited state when the entry of a predetermined number of game balls is detected. (For example, JP, 2014-004177, A). In such a gaming machine, when the variable winning device is in an entry-permitted state, a configuration in which the launching handle is rotated to the maximum and a game ball is launched with the maximum strength can be entered into the variable winning device with a high probability. Has become the mainstream.

  In a mainstream gaming machine, when the variable winning device is in an entry-permitted state, the game ball is launched at a predetermined constant strength (maximum strength), that is, with the launch handle rotated to the maximum. Since the game progresses in a fixed manner, the progress of the game tends to be monotonous, and there is room for improvement in terms of game play when a game ball is entered into the variable winning device.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming property when a game ball is entered into a variable prize opening (advance to a variable prize winning device). Yes.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 10, in order to obtain a privilege related to the entry of the game medium into the variable winning opening, the player can play the game in the middle of the period in which the variable winning opening is in the entry-permitted state. The firing of the medium must be adjusted. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game progress in the game when the game medium is entered into the variable prize opening can be improved as compared with the case where the privilege is not given even if the launch of the game medium is not adjusted. In addition, since there is a possibility that a privilege will be granted if the launch of the game medium is adjusted, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for granting a privilege in a game when the game medium is entered into the variable prize opening. . Therefore, the game playability when the game medium is made to enter the variable prize opening is improved.

<Feature 11>
The privilege granting means acts on the game medium flowing down the third flow down area, and the variable prize opening through the flow down time of the game medium entering the variable prize opening through the second flow down area and the third flow down area. A game medium flowing down through the second flow-down area and a game medium flowing down through the third flow-down area by causing a predetermined time lag between the flow-down time of the game medium entering the game medium by the launching means The gaming machine according to claim 10, which promotes reaching the variable winning award at an interval shorter than the shortest firing interval.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 11, by switching the strength of the game medium launched from the launching means, all through only the shortest shooting interval of the game medium, that is, one of the second and third downstream areas. The possibility of reaching the variable prize opening at a shorter interval becomes higher than the interval of the game media entering the variable prize opening when the game medium is caused to flow down. As a result, more than a predetermined number of game balls are likely to enter, and more game media can be paid out than planned, just before the entry of game balls into the variable prize opening is prohibited.

<Feature 12>
The privilege granting unit suppresses the flow of the game medium, and the subsequent game medium that has flowed down following the previous game medium in which the flow is suppressed approaches a predetermined range with respect to the preceding game medium. 11. The gaming machine according to claim 10, wherein in the case of the game machine, the flow restriction on the preceding game medium is released, and the preceding game medium and the subsequent game medium are caused to flow in a state in which they are close to each other within the predetermined range.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 12, the interval between the preceding game medium and the subsequent game medium is reduced in the flow-down process toward the variable winning opening by switching the strength of the game medium emitted from the launching unit. These game media are close to each other and can easily reach the variable prize opening. As a result, more than a predetermined number of game balls are likely to enter, and more game media can be paid out than planned, just before the entry of game balls into the variable prize opening is prohibited.

  Even if the preceding game medium and the subsequent game medium flow down through the third flow-down area, one of the preceding game medium and the subsequent game medium flows down through the second flow-down area, and the other flows through the second flow-down area. It may be the case of flowing down through the three falling areas.

<Feature 13>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 10 to 12, further comprising an informing means for informing information relating to a change in strength of a gaming medium for enjoying the privilege in the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 13, it is possible to surely provide all the players with an opportunity for giving a privilege, and to ensure fairness among the players.

<Feature 20>
An operation unit (launching handle 252) provided at a position where the player can operate and capable of performing a predetermined pseudo-reset operation;
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479);
When a predetermined pseudo-reset operation is performed on the operation unit in a predetermined game state (special game state, advantageous fluctuation state) more advantageous than the normal game state, the display content of the display unit is changed to a predetermined reset operation mode. A game machine characterized by comprising state transition means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for transition.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls (game media) can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and displays the final lottery display of the variable display in the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, when a big win is won in the normal gaming state, the game shifts to a so-called “probable change state” called “probability change state” after the end of the big win game (special game state). If a predetermined condition (for example, a big win) is established during the number of times (for example, 150 revolutions), the probability variation gaming state is continued, but if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period, the normal game A gaming machine that shifts to a state is known (for example, JP-A-2016-147203).

  However, like the above gaming machines, after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state shifts to an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state, such as the probability changing gaming state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in the probability changing gaming state. There is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having a configuration in which the probability variation gaming state (that is, the advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state) can be continued by being established. For example, if a player wins a big hit many times but continues to fail to establish a predetermined condition during a predetermined period, the player may feel boring and may reduce his willingness to play. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 20, an operation unit capable of performing a predetermined pseudo-reset operation is provided at a position where the player can operate, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. When a predetermined pseudo reset operation is performed on the operation unit in a predetermined game state, the display content of the display unit is shifted to a predetermined reset operation mode by the state transition unit. Thereby, the player who performed the pseudo-reset operation resets his / her mood by seeing a display of a predetermined reset operation mode different from the display content that should be originally displayed on the display unit during the game ( Can be switched).

  Therefore, the game flow in a predetermined gaming state that is advantageous over the normal gaming state is unfavorable, for example, the player continues to be unable to establish a predetermined condition during a predetermined period after shifting to the probability variation gaming state. If it is a situation, by performing a predetermined pseudo-reset operation on the operation unit, it is possible to renew the game by resetting its own mood, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation it can.

  The “predetermined reset operation mode” described in the feature 20 is not limited to being realized by displaying an image (moving image or still image), but instead of or in addition to the image display, a sound (predetermined reset operation mode) The operation may be realized by outputting an operation sound), may be a “predetermined mode”, or may be a “mode that outputs at least one of a predetermined display and a predetermined sound”.

<Feature 21>
A gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
Launching means (launching device 330) capable of launching a game medium (game ball) with strength according to an operation amount of the operation unit;
When the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined amount, the entrance (the winning opening of the upper right start winning device 731) is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching unit can enter. )When,
A detection unit (upper right start winning switch 741) capable of detecting the game medium that has entered the entrance;
With
The game machine characterized in that the state transition means shifts the display content of the display section to the predetermined reset operation mode when a game medium is detected by the detection section.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 21, when the game medium launched from the launching unit enters the entrance and is detected by the detection unit, the display content of the display unit is changed to a predetermined reset operation mode by the state transition unit. Migrate to The entrance is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching unit can enter when the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined amount.

  Therefore, since the operation unit for launching the game medium from the launching unit can be diverted as the operation unit for performing the pseudo-reset operation, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated operation unit, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. There is no need to operate a dedicated operation unit during a game performed by launching a game medium, and it is possible to avoid the troublesomeness of causing the player to perform a pseudo reset operation. Further, when the display content of the display unit is shifted to the reset operation mode, the player intentionally adjusts the operation amount of the operation unit so as to adjust the firing strength by the launching unit so that the game medium enters the entrance. Since it is necessary, the monotony of the game in which the game medium is fired from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit is reduced.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 21,
A flow-down region where the game medium launched by the launching unit flows down, and a first entrance through which the game medium can enter when the operation unit is operated with a first operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount ( A first flow-down area (right flow-down area 708) in which a game medium entering from the first entrance flows down, and the operation section is operated with a second operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount. And a second entrance (entrance 709A) provided at a position different from the first entrance, and the game media entering from the second entrance is the first entrance. A flow area including at least a second flow area (middle flow area 709) flowing down in a different path from the game medium flowing down the flow area,
The game medium flowing down the first flow-down area can contact the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area on the upstream side from the entrance and is not in contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area. When the game machine flows down along a path that cannot enter the entrance and comes into contact with a game medium that flows down the second fall area, the game machine can enter the entrance by changing the path due to the contact. .

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 22, by operating the operation unit with the first operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount, the game medium launched from the launching unit can enter the first entrance. The game medium that has entered the first inlet flows down the first flow area. On the other hand, by operating the operation unit with a second operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount, the game medium launched from the launching means can enter the second entrance, and the game medium entered the second entrance Flows down the second falling region. Therefore, the player can cause the game medium to flow down in the flow-down area corresponding to the operation amount by adjusting the operation amount with respect to the operation unit.

  Here, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area can come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area on the upstream side from the entrance. Here, when the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area does not contact the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area flows down along a path that cannot enter the entrance. On the other hand, when the game medium flowing down the first downstream area comes into contact with the game medium flowing down the second downstream area, the game medium flowing down the first downstream area is in contact with the game medium flowing down the second downstream area. It becomes possible to enter the entrance by changing the route.

  Therefore, in order to shift the display content of the display unit to the reset operation mode, the player makes a contact with the operation unit so that the game medium flowing down the first flow area and the game medium flowing down the second flow area contact each other. It is necessary to adjust the operation amount intentionally. Thereby, the monotony of the game in which the game medium is fired from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit can be suitably reduced.

<Feature 30>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479);
A first entrance through which a game medium (game ball) can enter (a winning port of the right start winning device 432);
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 442) that satisfies a start condition when a game medium that has entered the first entrance is detected;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
A holding means (main control board 920) for holding the lottery result by the lottery means;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for sequentially displaying a predetermined fluctuation display and a stop display indicating the lottery result after the fluctuation display on the display unit based on the lottery result held by the holding means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a game control means (main control) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the display control means displays a stop display indicating the lottery result. Substrate 920),
An operation unit (launching handle 252) provided at a position where the player can operate;
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game medium when the operation unit is operated;
When the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined amount, the second entrance (the upper right start winning device 731 of the upper right start winning device 731) is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching unit can enter. Winning prize)
A second detector (upper right start winning switch 741) capable of detecting the game medium that has entered the second entrance;
When a game medium is detected by the second detection unit in a state where at least one lottery result is held in the holding means, the lottery result held in the holding means for the at least one lottery result Delay means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for delaying the display timing of the stop display by the display control means or the occurrence timing of the special gaming state by the game control means based on the lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls (game media) can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and displays the final lottery display of the variable display in the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening while the display device is displaying a change in symbol, hit information used for a big win lottery is predetermined. Some are configured to be stored on hold with an upper limit of the number (for example, 4). At this time, the stored winning information is subjected to a lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit after the symbol variation display is completed, and the next symbol variation display is started accordingly.

  In recent years, when a big win is won in the normal gaming state, the game shifts to a so-called “probable change state” called “probability change state” after the end of the big win game (special game state). If a predetermined condition (for example, a big win) is established during the number of times (for example, 150 revolutions), the probability variation gaming state is continued, but if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period, the normal game A gaming machine that shifts to a state is known (for example, JP-A-2016-147203).

  However, like the above gaming machine, by establishing a predetermined condition during a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state advantageous to the normal gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state is continued. There is still room for improvement in gaming machines having a configuration that can be used.

  For example, as the “predetermined condition”, a player can play a game with respect to a specific device that operates according to a lottery result corresponding to each symbol variation display during a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state. In the case where a result (for example, so-called “V winning”) that occurs based on a game ball that has been launched is included, the player may leave the gaming machine, for example, when the game information shifts to the special game state with the hit information being held and stored. If the game ball cannot be fired, the chance of receiving a privilege in the probability variation gaming state (that is, the continuation of the probability variation gaming state) is wasted.

  In particular, when the “predetermined period”, which is a time limit for establishing a predetermined condition after the end of the special gaming state, is the number of times of variable display that is less than the upper limit value capable of holding and storing hit information, Leaving is equivalent to completely abandoning the privilege in the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, unless the player gives up the privilege in the probability variation gaming state by himself, the player may leave the gaming machine in which he / she plays until the probability variation gaming state ends without continuing (that is, until transition to the normal gaming state). It is impossible to take a break.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 30, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery means performs a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the lottery result is stored by the holding means. Deferred. Based on the lottery result held by the holding means, a predetermined fluctuation display and a stop display indicating the lottery result after the fluctuation display are sequentially displayed on the display unit by the display control means, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result. In this case, after the game control means displays a stop display indicating the lottery result by the display control means, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated.

  In a state where at least one lottery result is held in the holding means, when the game medium launched from the launching means enters the second entrance and is detected by the second detection unit, the game medium is held in the holding means. Among the lottery results, the display timing of the stop display by the display control means for at least one lottery result or the occurrence timing of the special game state by the game control means based on the lottery result is delayed by the delay means.

  Therefore, the player makes the game medium enter the second entrance with at least one lottery result held in the holding means, so that at least one lot of the lottery results held in the holding means is held. For the variable display, the period until the stop display or the period until the special gaming state occurs after the variable display is delayed from each timing when the game medium does not enter the second entrance under the same situation. Can do.

  Thus, the player causes the second detecting unit to detect the game ball in a state where at least one lottery result is held in the holding means until all the lottery results held in the holding means are processed. In this period, it is possible to leave the gaming machine by using the delay by the delay means. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege by establishing a predetermined condition during a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state, it is necessary without the player abandoning the privilege. Depending on the situation, you can leave the gaming machine.

  Here, since the second entrance is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching unit can enter when the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined amount, Since the person needs to intentionally adjust the operation amount of the operation unit so as to adjust the firing strength by the launching unit so that the game medium enters the second entrance, the game medium is removed from the launching unit by operating the operation unit. The monotony of the game that fires is reduced.

  The “second detection unit” in the gaming machine described in the feature 30 may be a detection unit that satisfies a start condition when a game medium is detected, or a start condition is satisfied when a game medium is detected. It may be a detection unit that does not. In other words, the “second entrance” in the gaming machine described in the feature 30 may be an entrance where the start condition is satisfied when the game medium enters, or the start condition is satisfied even when the game medium enters. The entrance may not be.

  Further, in the delay means in the gaming machine according to the feature 30, “at least one lottery result among the lottery results held in the holding means” is started when the second detection unit detects a game medium. In the case of a detection unit that does not satisfy the condition, “at least one lottery result among at least one lottery result held in the holding means before the game medium is detected by the second detection unit” There may be. Alternatively, when the second detection unit detects the game medium, the detection unit satisfies the start condition. “At least one held by the holding unit before the game medium is detected by the second detection unit” And at least one lottery result among lottery results lottery results lottered by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition when the game medium is detected by the second detection unit ”. May be.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
A flow-down region where the game medium launched by the launching unit flows down, and a first entrance through which the game medium can enter when the operation unit is operated with a first operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount ( A first flow-down area (right flow-down area 708) in which a game medium entering from the first entrance flows down, and the operation section is operated with a second operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount. And a second entrance (entrance 709A) provided at a position different from the first entrance, and the game media entering from the second entrance is the first entrance. A flow area including at least a second flow area (middle flow area 709) flowing down in a different path from the game medium flowing down the flow area,
The game medium flowing down the first flow-down area can contact the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area on the upstream side from the entrance and is not in contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area. When the game machine flows down along a path that cannot enter the entrance and comes into contact with a game medium that flows down the second fall area, the game machine can enter the entrance by changing the path due to the contact. .

  According to the gaming machine of the feature 31, by operating the operation unit with the first operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount, the game medium launched from the launching unit can be made to enter the first entrance. The game medium that has entered the first inlet flows down the first flow area. On the other hand, by operating the operation unit with a second operation amount that is a part of the predetermined amount, the game medium launched from the launching means can enter the second entrance, and the game medium entered the second entrance Flows down the second falling region. Therefore, the player can cause the game medium to flow down in the flow-down area corresponding to the operation amount by adjusting the operation amount with respect to the operation unit.

  Here, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area can come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area on the upstream side from the entrance. Here, when the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area does not contact the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area flows down along a path that cannot enter the entrance. On the other hand, when the game medium flowing down the first downstream area comes into contact with the game medium flowing down the second downstream area, the game medium flowing down the first downstream area is in contact with the game medium flowing down the second downstream area. It becomes possible to enter the entrance by changing the route.

  Therefore, when performing the delay by the delay means, the player intentionally sets the operation amount for the operation unit so that the game medium flowing down the first flow area and the game medium flowing down the second flow area contact each other. It needs to be adjusted. Thereby, the monotony of the game in which the game medium is fired from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit can be suitably reduced.

  The “second operation amount” described in the feature 31 may be completely different from the “first operation amount”, and a partial range of the “second operation amount” may be “first operation amount”. It may be an amount overlapping with a partial range.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31, wherein
A third entrance (a winning opening of the upper right start winning device 731) through which game media can enter;
A third detector (upper right start winning switch 741) capable of detecting the game medium that has entered the third entrance,
One of the third detection units or the second detection unit set in advance is configured as a detection unit that satisfies a start condition when a game medium passes,
The holding means includes a first lottery result (a lottery result of the second special symbol lottery) performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of a start condition when a game medium is detected by the first detection unit, and the first The second lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery) performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition when the game medium is detected by the second detector or the third detector is independent of each other. Hold and
The delay means is held by the holding means when the second lottery result is held by the holding means while a predetermined number of the first lottery results are held by the holding means. Among the lottery results, delay the display timing of the stop display by the display control means for at least one lottery result, or the occurrence timing of the special gaming state by the game control means based on the lottery result,
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for executing a predetermined notification when the predetermined number of the first lottery results are held by the holding means.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 32, when the second lottery result is held in the holding unit while the predetermined number of first lottery results are held in the holding unit, the delay by the delay unit Is executed. However, when the condition for performing the delay by the delay means is satisfied even though the delay by the delay means is not required, the player wastes time by the delay by the delay means. On the other hand, when a predetermined number of first lottery results are held by the holding means, the notification means executes a predetermined notification, so that the player may establish a condition for delaying by the delay means. It is possible to wait for the first lottery result held in the holding means to be processed so that the condition is not satisfied. Thereby, it can avoid suitably that a player wastes time by the delay by a delay means.

<Feature 40>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479);
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a change display of the identification information and a stop display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; With
When the predetermined long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the display control means is configured until the stop display is displayed after the identification information fluctuation display is started, compared to the case where the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied. A specific change display (change display for a specific period) is displayed on the display unit, and information indicating whether the player can leave the seat is available (separable information J). Is displayed on the display unit.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a start condition is established by a game ball (game medium) launched by a player entering the start port, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of the start condition. The symbol (identification information) corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a stop display following the variable display. At this time, if the stop display is a symbol corresponding to the lottery result indicating a big hit, the player after the stop display There is known a configuration in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs and a large number of prize balls (game value) can be paid out (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177).

  However, in such a conventional pachinko machine, since the game being executed may be progressed arbitrarily by another customer who is a third party, it is difficult for the player to leave the seat during the game. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 40, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the change display of the identification information and the lottery result by the lottery means performed based on the establishment of the start condition are supported. The stopped display of the identification information is displayed on the display unit by the display control means. Here, when the predetermined long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the display control means starts displaying the change display of the identification information and displaying the stop display as compared with the case where the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied. A specific change display having a long change time is displayed on the display unit, and information indicating whether the player can leave the seat is displayed on the display unit.

  No one can advance the game while the change display is displayed, that is, until the stop display is displayed after the change display. Therefore, when a specific fluctuation display is displayed on the display unit with a long fluctuation time compared to the case where the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied because the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, during the period of the specific fluctuation display Even if the player leaves the table, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding arbitrarily by another customer while leaving the seat.

  Therefore, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the player can leave his / her seat without worrying about the arbitrary progress of the game by other customers. In addition, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the display control means displays on the display section information indicating whether the player can leave the seat, so that the player can leave the seat. Based on the available information, you can know when you can safely leave your seat.

  In the gaming machine described in feature 40, the display unit that displays the specific variable display and the display unit that displays the away-seatable information may be the same display unit or different display units. . In other words, the configuration may be such that the separable information is displayed on the display unit that displays the specific variable display, or the separable information is displayed on a display unit that is different from the display unit that displays the specific variable display. It may be a configuration.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40,
Provided with an operation part (launching handle 252) provided at a position where the player can operate,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied based on a predetermined operation performed on the operation unit during the game.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 41, a long fluctuation occurrence condition is established based on a player performing a predetermined operation on an operation unit provided at a position where the player can operate during a game. Therefore, when the player operates the operation unit as necessary, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is established, and a situation where the player can safely leave the seat can be created.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40,
A payout means (payout device 540) for paying out a predetermined game value based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition;
The long variation occurrence condition is satisfied based on a situation in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out by the payout means within a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 42, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is established based on a situation in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out by the payout means within a predetermined period. By giving a chance to temporarily leave the gambling feeling that a player can hold due to the situation where a large number of gaming values can be paid out within the period, the player who became enthusiastic and enthusiastic It is possible to cool down.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a special game having a game value that can be paid out by the payout means after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed by the display control means than in the normal gaming state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a state,
The long variation occurrence condition is satisfied based on the fact that a plurality of special game states of a predetermined number of times are continuously generated within the predetermined period by the game control means.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 43, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the special control state is set by the game control means. As a result, a lot of gaming value can be paid out as compared with the normal gaming state. Since the long fluctuation occurrence condition is established based on the fact that a plurality of special game states of a predetermined number of times have occurred continuously within a predetermined period, the special game state has occurred continuously within the predetermined period. By giving an opportunity to temporarily leave the gambling feeling that the player can hold, it becomes possible to cool down the player who has become enthusiastic and held hot.

<Feature 44>
The gaming machine according to feature 42,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a special game having a game value that can be paid out by the payout means after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed by the display control means than in the normal gaming state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a state,
The long fluctuation occurrence condition is that the predetermined result is obtained by the lottery means within the predetermined period after the special control state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out by the payout means is generated by the game control means. A gaming machine characterized by being established based on being selected.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 44, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the special control state is displayed by the game control means. As a result, a lot of gaming value can be paid out as compared with the normal gaming state. After the occurrence of a special gaming state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out, a long fluctuation occurrence condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined result for generating the special gaming state is selected by a lottery means within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to calm down the player who has become enthusiastic and enthusiastic by giving him an opportunity to temporarily leave his / her euphoria in such a situation.

<Feature 50>
It is based on the fact that it has a variable entry part that can switch between an entry-permitted state in which a game ball is allowed to enter and an entry-restricted state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the entry-permitted state. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state by switching the variable pitching portion to the entry allowable state when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a predetermined lottery,
A value-added pitching portion (upper university winning device 434, general winning device 439C) that includes at least the variable pitching portion and is given a predetermined game value when a game ball enters;
A ball passage including a plurality of flow paths arranged upstream from the variable ball entry portion and arranged in the left-right direction, and enters the ball passage when the variable ball entry portion is in the entry allowable state. A first ball path (lower right path part 810C) capable of guiding all of the game balls to the value-added ball part,
A guide passage (branch passage 820) for guiding a game ball to an area where it cannot enter the first ball passage;
A ball path that is provided upstream of the first ball path and has a branch opening (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) to the guide path, and a game ball that has entered the ball path A second sphere passage (right middle passage portion 810B) for guiding to the first sphere passage or the guide passage;
A third ball passage that is connected to the upstream side of the second ball passage and includes a plurality of flow-down paths arranged in the left-right direction, and guides game balls that have entered the ball passage to the second ball passage. (Upper right passage portion 810B),
The gaming machine, wherein the first ball passage and the third ball passage have at least a section in which a passage portion thicker than the second ball passage continues in the vertical direction.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. The conventional typical pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device that can switch between an entry-permitted state that allows entry of game balls and an entry-restricted state that prohibits entry of game balls, and that the start condition is satisfied In the lottery performed based on this, a configuration is known in which a special game state is generated by switching the variable pitching portion to an entry-permitted state when a big win is won (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). Therefore, a player who plays with such a pachinko machine launches a game ball aiming at a variable prize device that is switched to an entry-permitted state in a special game state, and enters a game ball (game medium) into the variable prize device. It is possible to acquire a large number of prize balls (game value).

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine that can obtain a large number of prize balls by launching a gaming ball aiming at a variable winning device that is switched to an entry-permitted state in a special gaming state, such as the above gaming machine. was there. For example, for a player, it is preferable that all the game balls launched by the player in the special game state enter the variable prize device, so that the player can aim at the variable prize device switched to the entry-permitted state in the special game state. It is conceivable that all the played game balls enter the variable winning device. However, such a configuration may cause excessive management of the game on the game hall (hall) side due to excessive balls.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the variable pitching portion capable of switching between an entry permitted state in which entry of a game ball is allowed and an entry restricted state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the allowed entry state. A first ball passage is disposed further upstream. A second sphere passage is connected to the upstream side of the first sphere passage, and a third sphere passage is connected to the upstream side of the second sphere passage. The second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage. The guide passage is a ball passage that guides the game ball to an area where it cannot enter the first ball passage. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the third ball passage enters the second ball passage through the third ball passage and enters the first ball passage or the guide passage.

  Since the first ball path is configured such that all of the game balls that have entered the first ball path can be guided to the value-added ball section when the variable ball section is in an entry-permitted state, the third ball path All of the game balls that have entered the first ball path from the second ball path can enter the variable pitch part or other value-added pitch part. The value-added entrance portion is an entrance portion to which a predetermined game value is assigned when a game ball enters, and includes a variable entrance portion.

  On the other hand, since the second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage, not all of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage enter the first ball passage, some of which are It is guided to an area where it cannot enter the first ball path via the guide path.

  Here, the first sphere passage and the third sphere passage are configured to have at least a section in which a passage portion thicker than the second sphere passage continues in the vertical direction. That is, the second sphere passage has a passage portion that is narrower than the third sphere passage and the first sphere passage, so that the third sphere passage, the second sphere passage, and the first sphere passage are arranged in this order from the upstream side. It functions as a spherical passage including a constricted portion in the spherical passage.

  The game ball that has entered the third ball passage is configured as a ball passage including a plurality of flow-down paths in which the third ball passage is arranged in the left-right direction, and thus flows down while being scattered in the left-right direction in the third ball passage. When passing through the second ball passage including the constricted portion, the game balls scattered in the left-right direction flow down so as to be collected in the left-right direction. Therefore, since the flow of the game ball changes in the second ball passage, even if the player enters the guide passage from the branch port in the second ball passage, it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

  Since the first ball path is also configured as a ball path including a plurality of flow paths arranged in the left-right direction, game balls that have entered the first ball path via the second ball path flow down again while scattering in the left-right direction. To do. Therefore, since the flow of the game ball changes again by entering the first ball passage from the second ball passage, the game ball that has entered the third ball passage also enters the guide passage in the second ball passage. Even so, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change.

  In addition, during the special game state, the player displays a characteristic place in the special game state (for example, a variable entry part on the downstream side of the first ball passage, a display unit for displaying effects in the special game state, etc.). In this regard, even if a game ball that has flowed down the third ball passage enters the guide passage without entering the first ball passage in the second ball passage, It is hard to be recognized.

  Therefore, all of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage are guided by the part of the game ball that has entered the third ball passage to the area that cannot enter the first ball passage through the guide passage. Can be given to the player the illusion that the player is guided to the value-added ball club such as the variable ball club through the first ball path, so that a lot of game balls can be sensed in the special game state. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the player has entered the variable pitching section. Thereby, the interest of the game which launches a game ball aiming at a variable entrance part in a special game state can be improved.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 50, there is an improvement in the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the variable pitching portion in the special gaming state, and the gaming value acquired by the player is excessive. (Hall) side can be compatible with the reduction of disadvantages.

  In addition, it is preferable that the variable entry portion disposed downstream of the first ball passage has an entrance that opens to a predetermined width that is twice or more the diameter size of the game ball in the allowed entry state. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first ball passage can enter the variable ball entry portion from various positions in the width direction of the wide variable ball entry portion while scattering to the left and right. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the player has entered the variable pitching section.

  The variable entry portion may have a game ball entrance (winning entrance) configured to have a predetermined width that is at least twice the diameter of the game ball, and is allowed to enter by a movable member that opens and closes the entrance portion. It is possible to switch between a state and an entry restricted state, or a movable part that opens and closes a passage part of a game ball that is configured to have a predetermined width that is equal to or larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball that is provided on the downstream side with respect to the entrance part. You may switch an entry permission state and an entry control state with a member. In addition, the variable entrance portion may be configured such that the entrance is open so that the game ball can enter in the entry-permitted state, and the entrance is closed so that the game ball does not enter in the entry-restricted state. The game ball may be guided to the entrance at, and the game ball may not be guided to the entrance in the entry restricted state.

<Feature 51>
The gaming machine according to feature 50,
The value-added pitching portion includes the variable pitching portion and a non-variable pitching portion (general winning device 439C) into which a gaming ball can enter even in a gaming state other than the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the non-variable pitching portion is disposed at a position upstream of the variable pitching portion and into which a game ball that has entered the first ball path can enter.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 51, the non-variable pitching portion into which a game ball can enter even in a gaming state other than the special gaming state is upstream of the variable pitching portion as one of the value-added pitching portions. Since the game ball that has entered the first ball passage is disposed at a position where the game ball can enter, when the player launches the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry portion, the game ball is placed in the variable ball entry portion. Or, it is easy to pay attention to the variable and non-variable entrance parts, considering which of the non-variable entrance parts is entered. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 51, wherein
The non-variable pitching portion is configured as a pitching portion to which a lower gaming value is given when a game ball enters the game ball than when the game ball enters the variable pitching portion. .

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the non-variable pitching portion is configured as a pitching portion to which a lower game value is given when a gaming ball enters the game ball than when the gaming ball enters the variable pitching portion. Therefore, when a player launches a game ball aiming at the variable ball entry part, the player can expect the game ball to enter the variable ball entry part, and the variable ball entry part and the non-variable ball entry part. Easy to pay attention to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

<Feature 53>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 51 to 52, wherein
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-variable pitching portion is disposed closer to the variable pitching portion than a half of the height of the first ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 53, the non-variable pitching portion is disposed closer to the variable pitching portion than the half of the height of the first ball passage, so that the player It is easy to pay attention to the lower half side in the first ball passage having the ball portion and the non-variable ball entering portion. Therefore, since the possibility that the line of sight is deviated from the branch opening to the guide passage formed in the second ball passage is preferably increased, it is preferable to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage. It can be made difficult for a person.

<Feature 54>
The gaming machine according to feature 51 or 53, wherein
A branch port to the guide passage is formed on one side in the left-right direction of the second ball passage,
The gaming machine, wherein the non-variable pitching portion is disposed on the other side of the first ball path with respect to the one side in the left-right direction.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 54, the branch opening to the guide passage is formed on one side in the left-right direction in the second ball passage, while the non-variable entrance portion is in the left-right direction in the first ball passage. Since it is difficult for the player to monitor the branch opening to the guide passage by paying attention to the non-variable entrance portion, the game ball is the second ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not he has entered the guide passage in the passage.

<Feature 55>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 54, wherein:
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a predetermined effect image;
The branch port to the guide passage is formed on the side away from the screen of the display unit in the left-right direction of the second ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 55, the branch port to the guide passage is formed on the side away from the screen of the display unit capable of displaying a predetermined effect image in the left-right direction in the second ball passage. In the special game state, when the player pays attention to the effect displayed on the display unit, it becomes difficult for the player to monitor the branch to the guide passage. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide path in the second ball path.

<Feature 56>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 55, wherein
A ball guiding portion (a nail row including nail 411B, 411C, and 411D, a passage wall 811) arranged to guide the game ball in a downwardly inclined direction toward the branch opening to the guide passage;
In the section where the ball guide portion is disposed, a flow passage portion (between the nail 411B and the nail 411C, between the nail 411C and the nail 411D formed so as to be able to flow down the game ball in a direction intersecting the descending inclination direction. Between) and
A gaming machine in which a game ball that has passed through the flow-down passage portion enters the first ball passage without entering the guide passage.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 56, since the ball guiding portion is disposed so as to guide the game ball in a direction of inclining downward toward the branch port to the guide passage, the game ball flowing down is relatively fast. It is possible to guide to the branch port by a natural flow and enter the guide passage from the branch port. On the other hand, in the arrangement section of the ball guiding portion, a flow-down passage portion is formed in which the game ball can flow down in a direction intersecting the downward inclination direction, and the game ball passes through the flow-down passage portion. The first ball path can be entered without entering the guide path.

  The flow of the game ball that passes through the flow-down passage portion to enter the first ball passage is unnatural and relaxed compared to the case where it naturally flows along the ball guide portion. The flow tends to remain in the impression. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage from the branch port.

<Feature 57>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 56, wherein:
A viewable portion (front plate 222, rear plate) made of a light-transmitting member that is arranged on the front side of a game area where a game ball can flow down to make at least a part of the game area visible from the front side. 223) and a non-viewable part (front decorative body 210) formed around the visible part and configured so that the rear side from the front side is not visible or difficult to view (front block 210) 102)
The first sphere passage, the second sphere passage, and the third sphere passage are provided at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member,
The guide passage is provided at a position where at least a part of the game ball overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the invisible portion of the front side member when the game ball completely enters the guide passage. A gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 57, the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage are overlapped in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member, which is formed of a light transmissive member. Since it is provided at the position, these ball passages can be visually recognized from the front side through the visible portion. On the other hand, when the game ball completely enters the guide passage, at least a part of the game ball cannot be viewed from the front side to the back side or cannot be viewed. The game ball that has entered the guide passage from the second ball passage is located at the same time as the entry into the guide passage or immediately after entering the guide passage, at the rear side of the invisible portion Enter, thereby deviating from the player's view. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide path in the second ball path.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 57, as “when the game ball completely enters the guide passage”, for example, the surface on which the game ball forms a branch port to the guide passage (an entrance to the guide passage) The time when the game ball entered the guide passage (that is, the time when the game ball that entered the guide passage touches the surface may be reached). It may be.

<Feature 60>
A viewable portion (front plate 222, rear plate) made of a light-transmitting member that is arranged on the front side of a game area where a game ball can flow down to make at least a part of the game area visible from the front side. 223) and a non-viewable part (front decorative body 210) formed around the visible part and configured so that the rear side from the front side is not visible or difficult to view (front block 210) 102)
A main sphere passage (right sphere passage 810) that is formed in the right or left region of the game area and flows down the entered game ball to the downstream side;
A small amount of game balls out of the game balls branching from the main ball passage and flowing down the upstream portion of the main ball passage continuing upstream from the branch portion are on the outer edge side of the game area on the right side or A branch passage (branch passage 820) that branches to the left and flows down;
With
The main ball passage is provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member,
The branch passage is provided at a position where at least a part of the game ball overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the invisible portion of the front side member when the game ball completely enters the branch passage. A gaming machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. The conventional typical pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device that can switch between an entry-permitted state that allows entry of game balls and an entry-restricted state that prohibits entry of game balls, and that the start condition is satisfied In the lottery performed based on this, a configuration is known in which a special game state is generated by switching the variable pitching portion to an entry-permitted state when a big win is won (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). Therefore, a player who plays with such a pachinko machine launches a game ball aiming at a variable prize device that is switched to an entry-permitted state in a special game state, and enters a game ball (game medium) into the variable prize device. It is possible to acquire a large number of prize balls (game value).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines including the above gaming machines. For example, for a player, it is preferable that all the game balls launched by the player in the special game state enter the variable prize device, so that the player can aim at the variable prize device switched to the entry-permitted state in the special game state. It is conceivable that all the played game balls enter the variable winning device. However, such a configuration may cause excessive management of the game on the game hall (hall) side due to excessive balls.

  Therefore, a flow path of game balls is designed such that even a game ball launched with the aim of a variable winning device is partly removed from the variable winning device. However, a player may be dissatisfied when he / she fires aiming at a variable winning device and receives an impression that many of the launched game balls are flowing away from the variable winning device. . Similarly, if there is a branch passage that leads the game ball outside the game area for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game, the player is dissatisfied when the player receives the impression that many game balls enter the branch passage. There is a risk of embrace.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 60, a main ball passage that allows the game ball that has entered to flow downstream is formed in the right or left region of the game region where the game ball can flow down. At the same time, a branch passage that branches off from the main sphere passage is formed. A small amount of game balls of the game balls that have flowed down the upstream portion of the main ball passage continuing upstream from the branch portion from the main ball passage enter the branch passage, branch off from the branch portion, and enter. The game ball is allowed to flow down to the right or left side on the outer edge side of the game area. That is, among the game balls that have entered the main ball passage, a small amount of game balls do not flow down the main ball passage as they are, but flow down from the branch passage to the outer edge side of the game area.

  Here, since the main sphere passage is provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the viewable portion of the front side member, which is formed of the light transmissive member, the main sphere passage is formed from the front side through the viewable portion. It is possible to visually recognize. On the other hand, at the time when a game ball completely enters the branch passage, the branch passage is configured such that at least a part of the game ball is not visible or difficult to see from the front side to the back side. Since the game ball that has entered the branch passage from the main ball passage enters the branch passage, or immediately after entering the branch passage, Enter and thereby get out of the player's view.

  This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball flowing down the main ball passage has entered the branch passage, so that a small number of game balls that have entered the main ball passage pass through the branch passage in the game area. It is difficult to grasp that it was sent to the outer edge. Therefore, when a player launches aiming to pass through the main ball passage, even if all of the launched game balls do not pass through the main ball passage, the player is less likely to complain about the game.

  The “small amount” in the feature 60 is, for example, preferably less than 50%, preferably less than 30%, and less than 10% of the game balls flowing down the upstream portion of the main ball passage. Is preferred.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 60, the “at the time when the game ball has completely entered the branch passage” is, for example, a surface on which the game ball forms a branch opening (an entrance to the branch passage) to the branch passage. (I.e., when the game ball that has entered the branch passage touches the surface, or when the game ball enters the branch passage until it cannot return to the main ball passage) There may be.

<Feature 61>
A gaming machine according to feature 60,
A branch port (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) from the main ball path to the branch path is located in an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction around the line segment having the maximum horizontal length in the game area. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is formed at an end of the gaming area where the main ball passage is formed.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 61, the branch port from the main ball passage to the branch passage is within an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction around the line segment having the maximum horizontal length in the game area. Thus, it is formed on the end side of the game area where the main ball passage is formed. In other words, the branch entrance to the branch passage is arranged on the end side of the widest range in the left-right direction in the game area or a range corresponding to this, so that the player's line of sight hardly reaches the branch entrance to the branch passage. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage from the branch port.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 61, “an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction with respect to a line segment having the maximum horizontal length in the gaming area” is, for example, crossing the center of the gaming area in the horizontal direction The area is preferably an area having a vertical width of about 25% of the height of the game area centered on the line segment, and a game area centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferably an area having a vertical width of about 15% of the height of the game, centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the horizontal direction, and about 5% of the height of the game area. It is preferable that the region has a length in the vertical direction.

<Feature 62>
A gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61, wherein
A variable pitching portion that can be switched between an entry-permitted state in which entry of a game ball is allowed and an entry restriction state in which a game ball is less likely to enter from the entry-permitted state, and that can be opened to a predetermined width in the entry-allowed state Kamidai Prize winning device 434),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a predetermined lottery performed based on the establishment of the start condition, the variable pitching portion is switched to the entry allowable state to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920);
The main ball passage is disposed on the upstream side of the variable ball entrance portion, and when the variable ball entrance portion is in the entry allowable state, the main ball passage is disposed on the downstream side without entering the branch passage. All of the game balls flowing down to the value-added ball part including the at least the variable ball part and given a predetermined game value when the game ball enters (upper university winning device 434, general winning device 439C) ) Is configured as a ball passage capable of entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 62, when the variable ball entry portion is in the entry-permitted state in the special game state, all of the game balls that have entered the main ball passage become the variable ball entry portion. Since it is configured to be guided, all of the game balls that have entered the main ball passage without entering the branch passage can enter the variable entry portion or other value-added entry portion. The value-added entrance portion is an entrance portion to which a predetermined game value is assigned when a game ball enters, and includes a variable entrance portion.

  Therefore, even though a part of the game ball that has entered the main ball passage is sent to the outer edge side of the game area through the branch passage, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact and to enter the main ball passage. It is possible to give the player the illusion that all of the game balls are guided to the value-added entrance part such as the variable entrance part. It is possible to give the player an impression as if he / she has entered the game. Thereby, the interest of the game which launches a game ball aiming at a variable entrance part in a special game state can be improved.

<Feature 70>
It is based on the fact that it has a variable entry part that can switch between an entry-permitted state in which a game ball is allowed to enter and an entry-restricted state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the entry-permitted state. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state by switching the variable pitching portion to the entry allowable state when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a predetermined lottery,
A value-added pitching portion (upper university winning device 434, general winning device 439C) that includes at least the variable pitching portion and is given a predetermined game value when a game ball enters;
A spherical passage including three or more flow-down paths arranged upstream from the variable pitching portion and arranged in the left-right direction, and enters the ball passage when the variable pitching portion is in the entry-permitted state A first ball passage (lower right passage portion 810C) capable of guiding all of the played balls to the value-added entry portion,
A guide passage (branch passage 820) for guiding a game ball to an area where it cannot enter the first ball passage;
A ball path that is provided upstream of the first ball path and has a branch opening (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) to the guide path, and a game ball that has entered the ball path A second sphere passage (right middle passage portion 810B) for guiding to the first sphere passage or the guide passage;
A ball path including three or more flow-down paths that are arranged upstream of the second ball path and arranged in the left-right direction, and that guides game balls that have entered the ball path to the second ball path And a passage (upper right passage portion 810B).

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. The conventional typical pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device that can switch between an entry-permitted state that allows entry of game balls and an entry-restricted state that prohibits entry of game balls, and that the start condition is satisfied In the lottery performed based on this, a configuration is known in which a special game state is generated by switching the variable pitching portion to an entry-permitted state when a big win is won (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). Therefore, a player who plays with such a pachinko machine launches a game ball aiming at a variable prize device that is switched to an entry-permitted state in a special game state, and enters a game ball (game medium) into the variable prize device. It is possible to acquire a large number of prize balls (game value).

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine that can obtain a large number of prize balls by launching a gaming ball aiming at a variable winning device that is switched to an entry-permitted state in a special gaming state, such as the above gaming machine. was there. For example, for a player, it is preferable that all the game balls launched by the player in the special game state enter the variable prize device, so that the player can aim at the variable prize device switched to the entry-permitted state in the special game state. It is conceivable that all the played game balls enter the variable winning device. However, such a configuration may cause excessive management of the game on the game hall (hall) side due to excessive balls.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 70, a variable pitching portion capable of switching between an entry-permitted state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and an entry restriction state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the permitted entry state. A first ball passage is disposed further upstream. A second sphere passage is connected to the upstream side of the first sphere passage, and a third sphere passage is connected to the upstream side of the second sphere passage. The second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage. The guide passage is a ball passage that guides the game ball to an area where it cannot enter the first ball passage. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the third ball passage enters the second ball passage through the third ball passage and enters the first ball passage or the guide passage.

  Since the first ball path is configured such that all of the game balls that have entered the first ball path can be guided to the value-added ball section when the variable ball section is in an entry-permitted state, the third ball path All of the game balls that have entered the first ball path from the second ball path can enter the variable pitch part or other value-added pitch part. The value-added entrance portion is an entrance portion to which a predetermined game value is assigned when a game ball enters, and includes a variable entrance portion.

  On the other hand, since the second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage, not all of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage enter the first ball passage, some of which are It is guided to an area where it cannot enter the first ball path via the guide path.

  Here, each of the first ball path and the third ball path sandwiching the second ball path is configured as a ball path including three or more flow-down paths arranged in the left-right direction. It is difficult to specify the flow path of the game ball at, and the player's line of sight is dispersed. In addition, during the special game state, the player has a characteristic place in the special game state (for example, a variable entry portion located downstream from the first ball passage, a display unit that displays effects in the special game state, etc.) Therefore, even if a game ball flowing down the third ball passage enters the guide passage without entering the first ball passage in the second ball passage, it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

  Therefore, all of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage are guided by the part of the game ball that has entered the third ball passage to the area that cannot enter the first ball passage through the guide passage. Can be given to the player the illusion that the player is guided to the value-added ball club such as the variable ball club through the first ball path, so that a lot of game balls can be sensed in the special game state. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the player has entered the variable pitching section. Thereby, the interest of the game which launches a game ball aiming at a variable entrance part in a special game state can be improved.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 70, the game field where the game value that the player obtains is excessive and the game value that the player acquires is excessive, and the game value that the game ball is launched aiming at the variable pitching portion in the special gaming state. (Hall) side can be compatible with the reduction of disadvantages.

  In addition, it is preferable that the variable entry portion disposed downstream of the first ball passage has an entrance that opens to a predetermined width that is twice or more the diameter size of the game ball in the allowed entry state. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first ball passage can enter the variable ball entry portion from various positions in the width direction of the wide variable ball entry portion while scattering to the left and right. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the player has entered the variable pitching section.

  The variable entry portion may have a game ball entrance (winning entrance) configured to have a predetermined width that is at least twice the diameter of the game ball, and is allowed to enter by a movable member that opens and closes the entrance portion. It is possible to switch between a state and an entry restricted state, or a movable part that opens and closes a passage part of a game ball that is configured to have a predetermined width that is equal to or larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball that is provided on the downstream side with respect to the entrance part. You may switch an entry permission state and an entry control state with a member. In addition, the variable entrance portion may be configured such that the entrance is open so that the game ball can enter in the entry-permitted state, and the entrance is closed so that the game ball does not enter in the entry-restricted state. The game ball may be guided to the entrance at, and the game ball may not be guided to the entrance in the entry restricted state.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
A viewable portion (front plate 222, rear plate) made of a light-transmitting member that is arranged on the front side of a game area where a game ball can flow down to make at least a part of the game area visible from the front side. 223) and a non-viewable part (front decorative body 210) formed around the visible part and configured so that the rear side from the front side is not visible or difficult to view (front block 210) 102)
The first sphere passage, the second sphere passage, and the third sphere passage are provided at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member,
The guide passage is provided at a position where at least a part of the game ball overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the invisible portion of the front side member when the game ball completely enters the guide passage. A gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 71, the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage are overlapped in the front-rear direction with respect to the visually recognizable portion of the front-side member that is formed of a light-transmitting member. Since it is provided at the position, these ball passages can be visually recognized from the front side through the visible portion. On the other hand, when the game ball completely enters the guide passage, at least a part of the game ball cannot be viewed from the front side to the back side or cannot be viewed. The game ball that has entered the guide passage from the second ball passage is located at the same time as the entry into the guide passage or immediately after entering the guide passage, at the rear side of the invisible portion Enter, thereby deviating from the player's view. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide path in the second ball path.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 71, “when the game ball has completely entered the guide passage” refers to, for example, a surface on which the game ball constitutes a branch port (an entrance to the guide passage) to the guide passage. The time when the game ball entered the guide passage (that is, the time when the game ball that entered the guide passage touches the surface may be reached). It may be.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 70 or 71, wherein
The first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage are formed in a right side region or a left side region in a game area where a game ball can flow down,
A branch opening to the guide passage (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) is in a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction centering on a line segment having a maximum horizontal length in the game region. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is formed on an end side of the gaming area where the second ball passage is formed.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 72, the branch port to the guide passage is in a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction centering on a line segment having a maximum horizontal length in the gaming region. It is formed on the end side of the region where the second spherical passage is formed. In other words, the branch opening to the guide passage is arranged on the end side of the widest range in the left and right direction in the game area or a range corresponding to this, so that the player's line of sight hardly reaches the branch entrance to the guide passage. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage from the branch port.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 71, “an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction around the line segment having the maximum horizontal length in the gaming area” is, for example, crossing the center of the gaming area in the horizontal direction The area is preferably an area having a vertical width of about 25% of the height of the game area centered on the line segment, and a game area centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferably an area having a vertical width of about 15% of the height of the game, centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the horizontal direction, and about 5% of the height of the game area. It is preferable that the region has a length in the vertical direction.

<Feature 73>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 70 to 72,
A ball guiding portion (a nail row including nail 411B, 411C, and 411D, a passage wall 811) arranged to guide the game ball in a downwardly inclined direction toward the branch opening to the guide passage;
In the section where the ball guide portion is disposed, a flow passage portion (between the nail 411B and the nail 411C, between the nail 411C and the nail 411D formed so as to be able to flow down the game ball in a direction intersecting the descending inclination direction. Between) and
A gaming machine in which a game ball that has passed through the flow-down passage portion enters the first ball passage without entering the guide passage.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 73, since the ball guiding portion is disposed so as to guide the game ball in a downwardly inclined direction toward the branch opening to the guide passage, the flowing game ball can be moved relatively quickly. It is possible to guide to the branch port by a natural flow and enter the guide passage from the branch port. On the other hand, in the arrangement section of the ball guiding portion, a flow-down passage portion is formed in which the game ball can flow down in a direction intersecting the downward inclination direction, and the game ball passes through the flow-down passage portion. The first ball path can be entered without entering the guide path.

  The flow of the game ball that passes through the flow-down passage portion to enter the first ball passage is unnatural and relaxed compared to the case where it naturally flows along the ball guide portion. The flow tends to remain in the impression. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage from the branch port.

<Feature 80>
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball;
A first ball passage (forward flow area 809) provided in a game area through which game balls launched by the launching means can pass;
A branch portion that is formed to open in the front-rear direction to a game member (game board 400) that forms a game area upstream from the first ball passage, and the game ball that has not entered is the first ball. A branch part (through hole 871) for guiding the game ball that has entered into the different side of the game member in the front-rear direction from the first ball path, while passing through the path;
A game ball that has entered the branching portion is located on the front side or the rear side with respect to a position where the first ball passage is provided in the game area and overlaps at least a part of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction. A second spherical passage (backward flow region 808) provided so as to be able to pass through;
Entry probability changing means (nail 411F, recoil prevention member 805) arranged so as to be able to change the probability of entry of the game ball into the branching portion by the operation of launching the game ball. A featured gaming machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls (game media) can enter a winning opening (for example, JP-A-2014-004177).

  However, in the above gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in suitably utilizing the limited area in the gaming members constituting the gaming area. For example, in a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a plurality of ball passages for flowing a game ball along a predetermined flow path are provided, the plurality of ball paths are game members (for example, a game board) constituting a game area. Since the size of the gaming member is limited, the occupied area on the front side of the gaming member increases as the number of ball passages increases. Accordingly, the area for arranging the display unit and the movable member for production is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, the game member constituting the game area has an opening formed at the upstream side of the first ball passage so as to penetrate the game member in the front-rear direction. . The game balls that have not entered the branch section pass through the first ball path, while the game balls that have entered the branch section are guided to a different side of the game member in the front-rear direction from the first ball path. And enters the second ball passage.

  Since the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion can be changed by the launch operation of the game ball by the approach probability changing means, the player can change the first ball path or the second ball path by his own launch operation. A lot of game balls can enter the target ball passage.

  The second ball passage is formed at a position that is front or rear with respect to a position where the first ball passage is provided in the game area and overlaps at least a part of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the one ball passage and the second ball passage are provided on the same side of the game member, the occupied area in the game member can be suppressed, thereby securing an area for arranging a display unit, a movable member for production, and the like. It becomes possible to do. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to suitably use a limited area in the gaming members constituting the gaming area.

  In the feature 80, the “entry probability changing means” may be a member that changes the entrance probability of the game ball to the bifurcation portion according to the contact state with the game ball, or the launch intensity according to the launch operation. A launching device that can change the trajectory of the game ball by firing the game ball to change the probability of the game ball entering the branching portion may be used.

  In addition, the “first ball passage”, “branch portion”, “second ball passage”, and “entry probability changing means” in the feature 80 may be provided in a game area through which a game ball can pass. The area may be provided in an area through which the game ball passes due to the game ball flowing down due to its own weight, or an area through which the game ball passes while flying due to the influence of the firing force launched by the launching means (for example, a game It may be provided in an upstream area near the entrance portion of the area. In addition, the “entry probability changing means” is a position where the game ball that has moved downward and separated from the rail member (outer rail 402) that restricts the traveling direction of the game ball heading upward by the firing force can be contacted first. The probabilities of entering the branching portion can be efficiently changed in accordance with the operation of launching the game ball by the player.

  In addition, the “entry probability changing means” in the feature 80 may be configured so that the probability of entering the game ball into the bifurcation portion can be changed at least by the operation of launching the game ball. Thus, the probability of the game ball entering the branching section may be changed at least according to the game ball launch operation, or the game ball launch strength or launch speed differs by a certain amount or more with respect to a predetermined launch operation. When another launch operation is performed, the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion may be changed.

  The first ball passage and the second ball passage may be replaced with or in addition to the configuration of “change the probability of game ball entering the branching portion at least by the operation of launching the game ball” in feature 80. The ratio or ratio of the game balls passing through may be changed, or a game ball that has reached the position where the branch part is provided (or the position where at least a part of the branch part overlaps in the front-rear direction) goes to the branch part The probability of entering may be changed by at least a game ball launch operation.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in the feature 80 includes an operation unit provided at a position where the player can perform a launch operation, and the approach probability changing unit is configured to perform at least a branching unit by a game ball launch operation with respect to the operation unit. The game ball may be arranged so that the probability of entering the game ball can be changed.

<Feature 81>
A gaming machine according to feature 80,
An operation unit (launching handle 252) provided at a position where the player can perform the firing operation,
The launching means is for launching a game ball with an intensity corresponding to an operation amount of the operation unit when a launch operation is performed on the operation unit.
The approach probability changing means is arranged so that game balls launched from the launch means with a predetermined range of strength can be contacted, and game balls launched with the strength of the first range out of the predetermined range are in contact with each other. A gaming machine comprising: a member that improves a probability of entering a branching portion as compared to a case where a game ball launched at a strength not included in the first range in the predetermined range comes into contact.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 81, when the player performs a launch operation on the operation unit, the game ball is launched from the launching unit with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation unit. The approach probability changing means is arranged so that game balls launched from the launch means with a predetermined range of strength can be contacted, and when game balls launched with the strength of the first range of the predetermined range come into contact, The member which improves the approach probability to a branch part compared with the case where the game ball launched by the intensity | strength which is not contained in the 1st range among predetermined ranges contacts. Therefore, the player can cause the game ball to enter the aimed ball path in the first ball path or the second ball path by changing the operation amount with respect to the operation unit.

<Feature 82>
The gaming machine according to feature 80 or 81,
An entrance (upper right start winning device 731) through which a game ball can enter,
A game that passes through the second ball passage, and is a discharge portion that is formed so as to pass through the game member in the front-rear direction at a position upstream from the entrance and downstream from the second ball passage. A discharge portion (through hole 872) for discharging a ball to the same side of the gaming member in the front-rear direction and the first ball passage;
The game ball passing through the first ball passage can contact the game ball discharged from the discharge portion on the upstream side from the entrance.
The game ball discharged from the discharge unit travels along a path that cannot enter the entrance when the game ball passing through the first ball path does not contact, and passes through the first ball path. A game machine characterized by being able to enter the entrance by changing the route caused by the contact when the contact is made.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, the game ball passing through the second ball passage is discharged to the same side of the game member in the front-rear direction as the first ball passage through the discharge portion. The game ball passing through the first ball passage can come into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge portion on the upstream side from the entrance through which the game ball can enter. Here, when the game ball passing through the first ball passage does not come into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge portion, the game ball discharged from the discharge portion proceeds along a path that cannot enter the entrance. On the other hand, when the game ball passing through the first ball passage comes into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge portion, the game ball discharged from the discharge portion is changed by contact with the game ball passing through the first ball passage. It becomes possible to enter the entrance.

  Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the entrance, the game ball passing through the first ball passage comes into contact with the game ball at the timing when the game ball passing through the second ball passage is discharged from the discharge portion. Since it is necessary for the player to intentionally adjust the operation of launching the game ball, the monotony of the game in which the game ball is launched by the player's launch operation can be reduced. In addition, in order to allow the game ball to enter the entrance, a certain amount of skill of the player is also required, and in this respect as well, the monotony of the game in which the game ball is fired by the player's launch operation can be reduced. it can.

<Feature 83>
A gaming machine according to feature 82,
A guide part (protruding member 873) for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge port to a path that cannot enter the entrance;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guide portion is configured in a shape that can be temporarily supported at a position where a game ball passing through the first ball passage can contact.

  According to the gaming machine described in feature 82, the game ball discharged from the discharge port is guided to a path that cannot enter the entrance by the guide unit, so that the game ball passing through the first ball passage is discharged to the discharge unit. It is possible to prevent the game ball discharged from the discharge unit from entering the entrance, although it does not contact the game ball discharged from. On the other hand, since the guiding portion is configured to be temporarily supported at a position where the game ball passing through the first ball passage can come into contact with the guiding portion, the guide portion is first with respect to the game ball discharged from the discharge portion. The game balls passing through the ball passage can be easily brought into contact with each other, and the difficulty of entering the game balls into the entrance can be suppressed from becoming too high.

<Feature 90>
An operation unit (launching handle 252) provided at a position where the player can perform the firing operation;
A launching unit (launching device 330) that launches a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation unit when a launch operation is performed on the operation unit;
An upstream sphere passage (right sphere passage 810) through which game balls launched from the launching means with a predetermined range of strength flow down;
An aligned flow lower portion (lower grand prize) that is provided downstream from the upstream ball passage, and that flows the game balls passing through the upstream ball passage one by one in the lower right side or the lower left side to the downstream side. The upper surface of the device 433);
A ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower portion, and a first passage entrance (inlet 861A) that opens upward so that game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. ) A downstream first sphere passage (sphere passage 861) having
A first privilege granting unit (lower right start winning device 832) that is provided in the downstream first ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters;
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet (inlet 862A) that opens upward on the right or left side with respect to the first passage inlet and away from the aligned flow lower portion, and from the lower portion of the aligned flow to the lower right A downstream second ball passage (ball passage 862) in which game balls flowing down to the left or lower left side enter with a lower probability than the first passage entrance;
A second privilege grant unit (general winning device 439B) that is provided in the downstream second ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege grant unit when a game ball enters. A gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a winning opening through which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, or a starting opening through which a predetermined lottery such as a big win lottery is performed when a game ball enters For example, a game area is provided with a ball entry portion to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters (see, for example, JP-A-2014-004177).

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine provided with a ball entering portion to which a predetermined privilege is given as a gaming ball enters like the above gaming machine. For example, even though a player has aimed at a game ball while expecting to enter a ball-entry unit where a predetermined privilege is given as a game ball has entered, such as a prize opening, many of them If the player has an impression that he / she falls out of the pitching club, the player may be dissatisfied with the game being executed and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, after the game ball launched from the launching unit with a predetermined range of strength flows down the upstream side ball passage, the game ball is moved to the lower right side or the lower left side in the aligned flow lower part. One line at a time and flow down to the downstream side. A downstream first ball passage having a first passage inlet that is opened upward so that a game ball that has flowed down to the lower right side or the lower left side from the aligned flow lower portion is opened so as to be able to enter. The second passage opened upward so that a game ball flowing down from the aligned flow lower part to the lower right side or the lower left side of the right or left side of the downstream first ball passage may enter the lower right side or the lower left side. A downstream second spherical passage having an inlet is provided.

  At this time, the second passage entrance is provided such that the game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion enter with a lower probability than the first passage entrance, so the game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion Compared to the passage inlet (second passage inlet) of the side second sphere passage, it is easier to enter the downstream first sphere passage where the passage inlet (first passage inlet) is located near the lower part of the aligned flow. . According to such a configuration, whether or not the game balls that have flowed down from the aligned flow lower part mainly enter the downstream first ball path from the first path inlet in which the passage inlet is relatively close to the aligned flow lower part. In addition to giving such an impression to the player, even if the game ball cannot enter the first passage entrance, the player has the impression that it enters the second passage on the downstream side from the second passage entrance. Can be given to.

  As a result, when game balls are launched aiming at the upstream sphere passage, most of the game spheres that have passed through the upstream sphere passage and have reached the aligned flow lower part are the downstream first sphere passage or the downstream second sphere. A player can be made to feel as if being guided to a first privilege granting unit or a second privilege granting unit through a passage. Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the upstream ball passage.

  In particular, game balls that have reached the bottom of the rectifying flow are flown down while being rectified one by one in the bottom of the rectifying flow, so that the game is sequentially discharged from the bottom of the rectifying flow one by one. By looking at the sphere, almost all of the game spheres that have reached each of the downstream first sphere passage or the downstream second sphere passage, that is, the lower part of the rectified flow, are as follows. An illusion of entering the downstream first spherical passage or the downstream second spherical passage is likely to occur. Thereby, the interest of the game which launches a game ball aiming at an upstream ball path can be improved more suitably.

  Moreover, since the privilege set part (namely, the 1st privilege grant part and the 2nd privilege grant part) in which the game ball which reached | attained the rectification | flow current lower part can approach is mutually different, the rectification | flow current lower part The player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down. Therefore, also in this respect, the interest of the game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right ball passage 810 can be improved suitably.

<Feature 91>
An operation unit (launching handle 252) provided at a position where the player can perform the firing operation;
A launching unit (launching device 330) that launches a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation unit when a launch operation is performed on the operation unit;
An upstream sphere passage (right sphere passage 810) through which game balls launched from the launching means with a predetermined range of strength flow down;
A game ball that flows down the upstream ball passage is provided at a position where it can enter, and when a game ball enters, a predetermined privilege is given, or the game ball is discharged from the game area without giving a privilege. Upstream discharge section (upper prize-winning device 434, general winning device 439B),
An aligned flow lower portion (lower grand prize) that is provided downstream from the upstream ball passage, and that flows the game balls passing through the upstream ball passage one by one in the lower right side or the lower left side to the downstream side. The upper surface of the device 433);
A ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower portion, and a first passage entrance (inlet 861A) that opens upward so that game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. ) A downstream first sphere passage (sphere passage 861) having
A first privilege granting unit (lower right start winning device 832) that is provided in the downstream first ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters;
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet (inlet 862A) that opens upward on the right or left side with respect to the first passage inlet and away from the aligned flow lower portion, and from the lower portion of the aligned flow to the lower right A downstream second ball passage (ball passage 862) in which game balls flowing down to the left or lower left side enter with a lower probability than the first passage entrance;
A second privilege grant unit (general winning device 439B) that is provided in the downstream second ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege grant unit when a game ball enters. A gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a winning opening through which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, or a starting opening through which a predetermined lottery such as a big win lottery is performed when a game ball enters For example, a game area is provided with a ball entry portion to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters (see, for example, JP-A-2014-004177).

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine provided with a ball entering portion to which a predetermined privilege is given as a gaming ball enters like the above gaming machine. For example, even though a player has aimed at a game ball while expecting to enter a ball-entry unit where a predetermined privilege is given as a game ball has entered, such as a prize opening, many of them If the player has an impression that he / she falls out of the pitching club, the player may be dissatisfied with the game being executed and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, the game balls fired from the launching means with a predetermined range of strength flow down the upstream ball passage without entering the upstream discharge portion, In this section, one row is formed on the lower right side or the lower left side to flow down to the downstream side. A downstream first ball passage having a first passage inlet that is opened upward so that a game ball that has flowed down to the lower right side or the lower left side from the aligned flow lower portion is opened so as to be able to enter. The second passage opened upward so that a game ball flowing down from the aligned flow lower part to the lower right side or the lower left side of the right or left side of the downstream first ball passage may enter the lower right side or the lower left side. A downstream second spherical passage having an inlet is provided.

  At this time, the second passage entrance is provided such that the game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion enter with a lower probability than the first passage entrance, so the game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion Compared to the passage inlet (second passage inlet) of the side second sphere passage, it is easier to enter the downstream first sphere passage where the passage inlet (first passage inlet) is located near the lower part of the aligned flow. . According to such a configuration, whether or not the game balls that have flowed down from the aligned flow lower part mainly enter the downstream first ball path from the first path inlet in which the passage inlet is relatively close to the aligned flow lower part. In addition to giving such an impression to the player, even if the game ball cannot enter the first passage entrance, the player has the impression that it enters the second passage on the downstream side from the second passage entrance. Can be given to.

  As a result, when game balls are launched aiming at the upstream side ball passage, most of the game balls that have reached the bottom of the aligned flow pass the first privilege through the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball passage. It is possible to make the player feel as if being guided to the part or the second privilege granting part. Furthermore, since the game balls that reach the aligned flow lower part are game balls that have flowed down the upstream ball passage without entering the upstream discharge section, the game balls that have been launched aiming at the upstream ball passage are located on the upstream side. Even if it does not enter the discharge unit, it is possible to give the player a preferable impression as if it is finally guided to the first privilege grant unit or the second privilege grant unit. Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the upstream ball passage.

  In particular, game balls that have reached the bottom of the rectifying flow are flown down while being rectified one by one in the bottom of the rectifying flow, so that the game is sequentially discharged from the bottom of the rectifying flow one by one. By looking at the sphere, almost all of the game spheres that have reached each of the downstream first sphere passage or the downstream second sphere passage, that is, the lower part of the rectified flow, are as follows. An illusion of entering the downstream first spherical passage or the downstream second spherical passage is likely to occur. Thereby, the interest of the game which launches a game ball aiming at an upstream ball path can be improved more suitably.

  Moreover, since the privilege set part (namely, the 1st privilege grant part and the 2nd privilege grant part) in which the game ball which reached | attained the rectification | flow current lower part can approach is mutually different, the rectification | flow current lower part The player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down. Therefore, also in this respect, the interest of the game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right ball passage 810 can be improved suitably.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to feature 90 or 91,
When a game ball enters, a privilege that has a lower value than the privilege that is discharged from the gaming area without granting a privilege or that is granted by the first privilege grant unit or the second privilege grant unit Including a ball entrance (exhaust port 401A)
The game ball that has flowed down from the aligned flow lower part to the lower right side or the lower left side enters the entrance part with a lower probability than the probability of entering the first passage entrance or the second passage entrance. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when a game ball enters, the game ball is discharged from the game area without giving a bonus, or given by the first privilege granting unit or the second privilege granting unit. There is a pitching section that grants a privilege that is lower in value than the privilege to be played. Since the game balls that have flowed down from the aligned flow lower part to the lower right side or the lower left side enter the ball entry part with a lower probability than the probability of entering the first passage entrance or the second passage entrance, All of the game balls that have flowed down to the lower right side or the lower left side can be prevented from entering the first privilege grant unit or the second privilege grant unit via the first passage entrance or the second passage entrance. Thereby, since it can control that the privilege given to a player by the 1st privilege grant part or the 2nd privilege grant part becomes excessive, it will suffer from a disadvantage on the game hall (hall) side by granting an excessive privilege. Can be suppressed.

<Feature 93>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 90 to 92,
When a game ball enters, the game ball is discharged from the game area without granting a privilege, or a pitching unit that grants a privilege whose value is lower than the privilege granted by the first privilege grant unit ( Outlet 401A),
A variable mechanism (an entry restriction mechanism) provided at an entrance portion of the first privilege granting section and capable of switching between an entry permission state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and an entry restriction state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the entry permission state. 852),
When the game ball flowing down the downstream first ball passage flows downstream from the first privilege granting unit without entering the first privilege granting unit because the variable mechanism is in the entry restricted state. A gaming machine that enters the ball-entry unit.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 93, the game ball flowing down the downstream first ball passage is variable while the variable mechanism is allowed to enter the first privilege granting unit when the variable mechanism is in the allowable entry state. When the mechanism is in the entry restricted state, the mechanism flows down to the downstream side from the first privilege granting unit and enters the ball entry unit without entering the first privilege granting unit. When the game ball enters, the entrance part discharges the game ball from the game area without granting a privilege or grants a privilege that is lower in value than the privilege granted by the first privilege grant unit. Therefore, not all of the game balls that have entered the first ball passage downstream from the first passage entrance serve as the first privilege grant unit, so that the grant of the privilege becomes excessive and the game hall (hall) side becomes It can suppress suffering a disadvantage. Moreover, it can suppress suitably that the behavior of the game ball discharged | emitted from the rectifying flow lower part becomes monotonous.

  Note that at least one feature described in the features 10 to 93 may be applied in combination with any one or more of the features. The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, and a passage section for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in a gaming area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  A spinning machine such as a slot machine: the rotation of the circulating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the circulating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is made according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants bonuses.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a gaming machine such as a ball game machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Pachinko machine, 250 ... Launch operation device, 252 ... Launch handle, 330 ... Launch device, 400 ... Game board, 402 ... Outer rail, 403 ... Inner rail, 404 ... Return ball prevention mechanism, 405 ... Recoil prevention member, 407 ... Left downstream region, 408 ... Right downstream region, 409 ... Medium downstream region, 411F ... Nail, 420 ... Central structure, 421 ... Left wall portion, 422 ... Right wall portion, 423 ... Medium wall portion, 424 ... Guide passage 424A ... Advance entrance, 424B ... Release port, 425 ... Path switching mechanism, 425A ... Delay guide passage plate, 433 ... Lower grand prize device, 434 ... Upper grand prize device, 439A-439C ... General prize device, 443 ... Lower big Winning switch, 444 ... Upper prize winning switch, 479 ... Decorative symbol display device, 432 ... Right starting winning device, 442 ... Right starting winning switch, 708 ... Right down region, 708A ... Right flow Entrance of area, 709... Middle downstream area, 709 A. Entrance of middle downstream area, 731. Upper right start winning device, 741. Upper right start winning switch, 920. Main control board, 940. Secondary control board, J. Possible information, 810 ... right sphere passage, 810A ... upper right passage portion, 810B ... right middle passage portion, 810C ... lower right passage portion, 820 ... branch passage, 808 ... rearward flow region, 809 ... forward flow region, 861 ... ball passage , 862 ... Ball passage, 832 ... Lower right start winning device, 871 ... Through hole, 872 ... Through hole, 873 ... Projecting member

Claims (3)

An operation unit provided at a position where the player can perform a firing operation;
A launching means for launching a game ball with an intensity according to an operation amount of the operation unit when a launch operation is performed on the operation unit;
An upstream ball passage through which game balls launched from the launching means with a predetermined range of strength flow down;
An aligned flow lower portion provided downstream from the upstream sphere passage and causing the game balls passing through the upstream sphere passage to flow down to the downstream side in a row on the lower right side or the lower left side;
A ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower portion, and having a first passage entrance opened upward so that game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. Side first ball passage,
A first privilege granting unit that is provided in the downstream first ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters;
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet that opens upward on the right or left side with respect to the first passage inlet and away from the aligned flow lower portion, the right lower side or the lower left side from the aligned flow lower portion A second ball passage on the downstream side in which the game ball that has flowed down into the first passage enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage;
A second privilege granting unit that is provided in the downstream second ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit when a game ball enters. A gaming machine characterized by An operation unit provided at a position where the player can perform a firing operation;
A launching means for launching a game ball with an intensity according to an operation amount of the operation unit when a launch operation is performed on the operation unit;
An upstream ball passage through which game balls launched from the launching means with a predetermined range of strength flow down;
A game ball that flows down the upstream ball passage is provided at a position where it can enter, and when a game ball enters, a predetermined privilege is given, or the game ball is discharged from the game area without giving a privilege. An upstream discharge section,
An aligned flow lower portion provided downstream from the upstream sphere passage and causing the game balls passing through the upstream sphere passage to flow down to the downstream side in a row on the lower right side or the lower left side;
A ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower portion, and having a first passage entrance opened upward so that game balls flowing down from the aligned flow lower portion to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. Side first ball passage,
A first privilege granting unit that is provided in the downstream first ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters;
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet that opens upward on the right or left side with respect to the first passage inlet and away from the aligned flow lower portion, the right lower side or the lower left side from the aligned flow lower portion A second ball passage on the downstream side in which the game ball that has flowed down into the first passage enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage;
A second privilege granting unit that is provided in the downstream second ball passage and grants a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit when a game ball enters. A gaming machine characterized by   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.